Contents

Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 489
1 of 489

Summary of Content for Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual PDF

2014 ARMADA OWNERS MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2 0 1 4 N

IS S

A N

A R

M A

D A

T A

6 0

-D

Printing : September 2013 (19) Publication No.:

Printed in U.S.A. TA60-D14 OM14E TA60U0

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with confidence. It was produced using the latest techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under- stand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome- ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties cov- ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide explains details about maintaining and servicing your ve- hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your states lemon law.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle best. When you require any service or have any questions, they will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory installed options, your ve- hicle may also be equipped with additional ac- cessories installed by NISSAN or by your NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular ac- cessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owners Manual carefully. This will ensure famil- iarity with controls and maintenance require- ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE- MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!

NEVER drive under the influence of al- cohol or drugs.

ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro- priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat.

ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

ALWAYS review this Owners Manual for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRSTTHEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive models, a mark is placed at the begin- ning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read Driving safety precautions in the Start- ing and driving section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV- ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, fail- ure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be sure to read On-pavement and off- road driving precautions, and Avoid- ing collision and rollover, and Driving safety precautions, in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or per- formance problems resulting from modi- fications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

This manual includes information for all options available on this model. Therefore, you may find some information that does not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications or design without notice and with- out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moder- ate personal injury or damage to your ve- hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro- cedures must be followed carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means Do not do this or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth de- fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter- ies, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: Perchlorate Material special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon and Clarion.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio requires sub- scription, sold sepa- rately. Not available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam. For more information, visit www.siriusxm.com.

2012 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:

Your name, address, and telephone number

Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side)

Date of purchase

Current odometer reading

Your NISSAN dealers name

Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

1. 3rd row bench seat belts (P. 1-24) 2. 2nd row seat belts (P. 1-24) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 4. Front seat belts (P. 1-24) 5. Head Restraints (P.1-7 ) 6. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-57) 7. Seats (P. 1-2) 8. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-64) 9. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-70) 10. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-57) 11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-38) 12. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor

(P. 1-52) 13. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap

anchor (P. 1-53) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

WII0154

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-23) 2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-28) 3. Windshield (P. 8-20) 4. Power windows (P. 2-51) 5. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key,

keys (P. 3-5, 3-12, 3-2) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-32) 7. Tire pressure (P. 9-12) 8. Flat tire (P. 6-3) 9. Tire chains (P. 8-43) 10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-33) 11. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-30) 12. Fog light switch (P. 2-34) 13. Tow hooks (if so equipped) (P. 6-14) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

WII0123

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Roof rack (P. 2-49) 2. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13) 3. Glass hatch (P. 3-28) 4. Rear window washer (P.2-29) 5. Glass hatch release (P.3-28) 6. Lift gate release (P. 3-27) 7. Rearview monitor (if so equipped)

(P.4-33) 8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-33) 9. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-28, P. 9-3, 9-5) 10. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-28) 11. Child safety rear door locks (P. 3-7) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

WII0111

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Rear ventilators (P. 4-39) 2. Storage (P. 2-40) 3. DVD entertainment system

(if so equipped) (P. 4-76) 4. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-54) 5. Map lights (P. 2-58) 6. Sun visors (P. 3-31) 7. HomeLink (P. 2-58) 8. Glove box (P. 2-41) 9. Seats (P. 1-2) 10. Cup holders (P. 2-44) 11. Luggage storage (P. 2-47) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

LII0022

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-39) 2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-30) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-94, P. 4-96, 4-111)

4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-33) 5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-57, P. 2-34) 6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-4, 2-13) 7. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-20) 8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch (P. 2-28, P. 2-29)

9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9) 10. Display screen/Display screen with

navigation system* (if so equipped) (P.4-4, , P. 4-16)

11. Navigation system* controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-16)

12. Audio system controls (P. 4-44) 13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-57) 14. Glove box (P. 2-41)LIC2435

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Hazard lights (P. 6-2) 16. Climate controls (P. 4-40) 17. Power outlet/cigarette lighter

(accessory) (P. 2-38) 18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34) 19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P. 5-33) 20. Shift selector (P. 5-14) 21. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-66) 22. Power outlet (P. 2-38) 23. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-27) 24. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-30) 25. Front and rear sonar system off switch

(P. 2-36) 26. Pedal position adjustment switch

(P. 3-31) 27. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-30) 28. Power vent window (if so equipped)

(P. 2-53) 29. Lift gate open/close switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-23) *: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

1. Battery (P. 8-14) 2. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23) 3. Transmission dipstick (P. 8-11) 4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9) 5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13) 7. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 8. Drive belt location (P.8-16) 9. Radiator cap (P. 8-7) 10. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9) 12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7) See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

WDI0630

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning light

Name Page

or

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn- ing light

2-14

Automatic transmis- sion check warning light

2-14

Automatic transmis- sion park warning light ( model)

2-14

or

Brake warning light 2-14

Charge warning light

2-15

Warning light

Name Page

Check suspension warning light (if so equipped)

2-15

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light

2-15

4WD warning light ( model)

2-16

Low fuel warning light

2-16

Low tire pressure warning light

2-16

Master warning light 2-18

Seat belt warning light and chime

2-18

Warning light

Name Page

Supplemental air bag warning light

2-18

Indicator light

Name Page

Front passenger air bag status light

2-19

High beam indicator light (Blue)

2-19

Malfunction indica- tor light (MIL)

2-19

Security indicator light

2-20

Slip indicator light 2-20

Tow mode ON indi- cator light (if so equipped)

2-20

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Indicator light

Name Page

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

2-20

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

2-20

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front power seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 2nd row captains chair adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 2nd row bench seat adjustment (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Head restraints (1st row only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Head restraints (2nd row outboard positions only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Adjustable headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 3rd row power folding seats (if so equipped) . . . . . 1-22

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 Installing top tether strap (2nd row captains chairs or 2nd row bench seat [if so equipped] ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 Installing top tether strap (3rd row bench seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. See Precau- tions on seat belt usage later in this section.

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the pas- senger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Operating tips

The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.

Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

See Automatic drive positioner in Pre-driving checks and adjustments for automatic drive po- sitioner operation.

Forward and backward Moving the switch forward or backward will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position.

Reclining Move the recline switch backward until the de- sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback forward again, move the switch forward and move your body forward. The seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

LRS0633

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (drivers seat) Push the front or rear end of the switch up or down to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (drivers seat) The lumbar support feature provides lower back support to the driver. Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

2ND ROW CAPTAINS CHAIR ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Reclining To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever and lean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat- back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

LRS0634 LRS0635 WRS0369

1-4 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row The 2nd row captains chairs can be tipped for- ward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the 3rd row 1 , raise the armrest so it is parallel to the seatback and in the stowed position, then lift up on the seatback latch located on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row captains chair and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base. This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Then 2 lift up on the lower corner of the seat base and tip the 2nd row captains chair forward. To exit the 3rd row bench seat, lift up on the same seatback latch and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever and lean back.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat- back for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit (see Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).

WRS0415 LRS0372 Outboard seats

WRS0369

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. See Precautions on seat belt usage later in this section.

Tip up for easy entry to the 3rd row The outboard seating positions on the 2nd row bench seat can be tipped forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row bench seat. To enter the 3rd row 1 , lift up on the seatback latch located on the upper corner of the seatback on the 2nd row bench seat and fold the seatback forward at an angle over the seat base. This will release the back of the seat so it may be tipped forward.

Then 2 lift up on the lower corner of the seat base and tip the outboard seating position of the 2nd row bench seat forward. To exit the 3rd row bench seat, lift up on the same seatback latch and fold the seatback forward onto the seat base. Then lift up on the seat base and tip it forward.

WARNING

When returning the seatbacks to the up- right position, be certain they are com- pletely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passen- gers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0414 LRS0331

1-6 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARMRESTS To use the armrests, pull them down to the rest- ing position.

A Stowed position

B Resting position

HEAD RESTRAINTS (1st row only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve- hicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in cer- tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effec- tiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

WRS0368

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints. The first row head restraints are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest.

Components 1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2071 LRS0887

1-8 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Adjustment Adjust the head restraint so the center is level with the center of the seat occupants ears.

To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

WRS0134 LRS0888 LRS0889

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad- justable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re- straint before an occupant uses the seating position.

Install 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the adjustment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position.

Front-seat Active Head Restraints

The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz- ing the force that the seatback receives from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the head restraint helps support the occu- pants head by reducing its backward movement and helping absorb some of the forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions at low to medium speeds in which it is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head restraints return to their original position.

LRS0890 LRS0891 SPA1025

1-10 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as described in this section.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (2nd row outboard positions only)

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other ve- hicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in cer- tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head restraints properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the head restraint stalks. Do not use the seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effec- tiveness of the head restraints. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints. The second row head restraints are removable but not adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest.

LRS2071

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Components 1. Head restraint

2. Lock knob

3. Stalks

Removal Use the following procedure to remove the head restraints.

1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary.

2. Push and hold the lock knob(s).

3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removed from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad- just the seat or seatback before an occupant uses the seating position.

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is facing the correct direction.

2. Push the head restraint down until it locks in place.

LRS2073 LRS2074 LRS2075

1-12 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST

WARNING

The adjustable headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against in- jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the headrests properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the adjustable headrest stalks . Do not use the seat if the adjustable headrests have been removed. If the headrest was removed, reinstall and prop- erly adjust the headrest before an occu- pant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the adjustable headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the headrests are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with an adjustable headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or adjustable headrest.

LRS2072

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Components 1. Adjustable headrest

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

Adjustment Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the center of the seat occupants ears.

To raise the headrest, pull it up. LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888

1-14 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down.

Removal Use the following procedure to remove the ad- justable headrests.

1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the headrest from the seat.

4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest before an occupant uses the seating posi- tion.

Install 1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in

the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the ad- justment notches 1 must be installed in the hole with the lock knob 2 .

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc- cupant uses the seating position.

LRS0889 LRS0890 LRS0891

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are in the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or any luggage is on the rear seats.

Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Always replace and adjust them prop- erly if they have been removed for any reason.

If the head restraints are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.

When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched posi- tion. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an acci- dent or sudden stop.

Properly secure all cargo to help pre- vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Folding the front passengers seatback (if so equipped) To fold the front passengers seatback flat for extra storage length when transporting long items:

1 Slide the seat to the rear-most position by moving the switch backward until the seat comes to a stop. Then recline the seatback as far forward as possible using the recline switch. Lift up on the latch located on the upper corner of the seatback to release the back of the seat.

LRS0341

1-16 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Once the seatback is released, it will enable you to fold the front passenger seatback flat over the seat cushion.

3. To return the front passengers seat to a seating position, lift up on the seatback and push it up to an upright position. Move the recline switch backward until the desired angle is obtained.

WARNING

If you fold the front passengers seat- back flat forward to carry longer ob- jects, be sure this cargo is properly se- cured and not near an air bag. In a crash, an inflating air bag might force that object toward a person. This could cause severe injury or even death. Se- cure objects away from the area in which an air bag would inflate. See Precautions on supplemental restraint system later in this section.

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the front passengers seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers could re- sult in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Folding the 2nd row captains chairs (if so equipped) To fold the 2nd row captains chairs flat for maxi- mum cargo hauling:

1 Raise the armrest to the stowed position. Remove the 2nd row center console, see 2nd row center console in the Instruments and controls section of this Owners Manual.

2 Pull the strap forward, located in the center of the seat cushion, and fold the seat cush- ion toward the front of the vehicle.

LRS0342 LRS0332

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

3 Pull the strap to release the head restraint rearward.

4 Then lift up on the recline lever to fold the seatback flat forward.

5 There is a carpet panel flap that can be folded toward the back of the vehicle.

LRS2063 LRS2096 LRS2097

1-18 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6 The carpet panel flaps provide a level cargo floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded flat. Reverse this process to return the 2nd row captains chairs to a seating position. Make sure to properly raise the seat- back to an upright position and push the seat cushion down into place.

7. Rotate the head restraint forward to return it to the normal seating position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal seating position, the head restraints must be returned to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants.

Folding the 2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling:

1 Pull the strap forward, located in the center of each seat cushion, and fold each seat cushion toward the front of the vehicle.

LRS2066 LRS2098

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

2 Pull the strap to release the head restraint rearward.

3 Then lift up on the recline lever on the side of the outboard seats to fold the outboard seat- backs flat. To fold the center seatback flat, pull up on the strap on the edge of the center seat cushion and fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle.

4 There is a carpet panel flap on the back of each seat that can be folded toward the back of the vehicle.

LRS2063 LRS2099 LRS2068

1-20 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5 The carpet panel flap provides a level cargo floor when the 3rd row seats are also folded flat.

6. To return the outboard 2nd row bench seats to a seating position, reverse the process for the outboard seats.

7. To return the center seat to a seating posi- tion, lift up on the pull strap on the back of the seat base while lifting on the seatback. Then push the seat cushion back into place. Make sure to hold the seat belts above the seat cushion and properly raise the seatback to an upright position. Then push the seat cushion down into place.

8. Rotate the head restraint forward to return it to the normal seating position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal seating position, the head restraints must be returned to the upright position to properly protect vehicle occupants.

Folding the 3rd row split bench seat (if so equipped)

To fold the 3rd row split bench seat flat for maximum cargo capacity:

1. Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base. See Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt later in this section.

2. Lower the head restraints to the full down position.

3. Then pull up on the latch located on the outside corner of each seatback and fold the seatback forward over the seat base.

LRS2078 LRS0637

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

To return the 3rd row split bench seat to a seating position, unfold the seatback and push it back until it latches into position.

WARNING

When returning the seatbacks, be sure to attach the rear center seat belt connector.

Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat.

When attaching the rear center seat belt connector, be certain that the seat- backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured.

If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud- den stop.

3RD ROW POWER FOLDING SEATS (if so equipped)

The 3rd row power folding seat controls are located behind the 2nd row seat (passengers side) on the 3rd row cup holder console 1 . There are also controls located on the rear quar- ter trim panel behind the 3rd row seats (passen- gers side) 2 .

Before operating the 3rd row seats:

Make sure the 2nd row seatback isnt re- clined.

Lower the 3rd row headrest to the full down position.

Disconnect and secure the center seat belt and tongues into the retractor base. See Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt later in this section.

Always reconnect the center seat belt when the seat is returned to the upright position.

Make sure that there are no objects on the seatback cushion.

CAUTION

Make sure the seat(s) is returned to the full upright position before a passenger sits in the seat(s).

When folding or returning the seat(s) to the upright position, to avoid injury to yourself and others:

Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.

Be careful not to allow hands or feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.

LRS0792

1-22 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To fold down the 3rd row seats, push and hold the bottom portion of the switch.

To raise the 3rd row seats, push and hold the top portion of the switch.

A chime will sound three times to indicate the start of the operation.

A warning beep will sound 5 times if the seat isnt in the full upright or folded position when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. If the warning beep is still present after one complete cycle and if the seats are in the full upright or folded position, bring your vehicle in for service.

If the ignition switch is off, the power folding seats are always operational.

If the ignition switch is on, the power folding seats are only operational when the shift selector is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

If the engine is started during operation, the seat(s) will temporarily pause.

NOTE:

Operating the power folding seats can dis- charge the vehicle battery if the vehicle is not running.

LRS0793

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad- justed and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supple- mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

1-24 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly re- strained in the rear seat and, if appro- priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

The seat belt should be properly ad- justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an acci- dent. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

WARNING

Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.

Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.

If the seat belt warning light glows con- tinuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- function in the system. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious per- sonal injury.

Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti- vated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. See your NISSAN dealer.

Removal and installation of preten- sioner system components should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

All seat belt assemblies, including re- tractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- mends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced un- less the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

All child restraints and attaching hard- ware should be inspected after any col- lision. Always follow the restraint manufacturers inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

SSS0014

1-26 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab- dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode acti- vated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already un- buckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. See Seats earlier in this

section.

2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock dur- ing a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the re- tractor.

Front seat shown LRS0633 WRS0137

1-28 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown.

4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. See Child re- straints later in this section for more information.

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten- sion. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely se- cured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0138

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Unfastening the seat belts

1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- tracts.

Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.

When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and re- strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any questions about seat belt opera- tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Center of the 3rd row bench seat The 3rd row center seat belt has a connector tongue 1 and a seat belt tongue 2 . Both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be securely latched for proper seat belt opera- tion.

WRS0139 SSS0240

1-30 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Always fasten the connector tongue and the seat belt in the order shown.

Always make sure both the connector tongue and the seat belt tongue are secured when using the seat belt or installing a child restraint. Do not use the seat belt or child restraint with only the seat belt tongue attached. This could result in serious personal injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop.

Stowing the 3rd row center seat belt

When folding down the 3rd row seat, the 3rd row center seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position as follows:

1 Hold the connector tongue so that the seat belt does not retract suddenly when the tongue is released from the connector buckle. Release the connector tongue by inserting a suitable tool such as a key into the connector buckle A .

2 Retract the seat belt up to the retractor base.

3 Insert the seat belt tongue into the fabric sleeve so it will lay flat. Then secure the connector tongue into the retractor base.

SSS0241

LRS0432

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

WARNING

Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat.

When attaching the rear center seat belt connector, be certain that the seat- backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured.

If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud- den stop.

Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt

Always be sure the 3rd row center seat belt connector tongue and connector buckle are at- tached. Disconnect only when folding down the rear seat.

To connect the buckle:

1 Pull out the connector tongue from the re- tractor base.

2 Pull out the seat belt tongue from the fabric sleeve.

3 Pull the seat belt and secure the receiver buckle until it clicks.

The center seat belt connector tongue and re- ceiver buckle are indicated by the > and < marks.

The center seat belt connector tongue can be attached only into the rear center seat belt con- nector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see Fastening the seat belts earlier in this section.

LRS0433

1-32 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Do not unfasten the rear center seat belt connector except when folding down the rear seat.

When attaching the rear center seat belt connector, be certain that the seat- backs are completely secured in the latched position and the rear center seat belt connector is completely secured.

If the rear center seat belt connector and the seatbacks are not secured in the correct position, serious personal injury may result in an accident or sud- den stop.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front and 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad- justed to the position best for you. (See Precau- tions on seat belt usage earlier in this section.) To adjust, pull out 1 the adjustment button and move the shoulder belt anchor 2 to the desired position so the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Re- lease the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

After adjustment, release the adjust- ment button and try to move the shoul- der belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effec- tiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur- chasing an extender if an extender is required.

Front and 2nd row outboard seats LRS0242

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

WARNING

Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.

Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured in a collision or a sud- den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom- mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac- tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un- buckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.

CHILD SAFETY

1-34 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

There are three basic types of child restraint systems:

Rear-facing child restraint

Forward-facing child restraint

Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear- facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec- tion. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri- tories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. See Child re- straints later in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth- ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. See Child restraints later in this section for more information.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- tem (air bag system) for the front passen- ger. See Supplemental restraint system later in this section.

INFANTS Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- mends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- facturers instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear- facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child re- straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur- ers instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve- hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for instal- lation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi- mum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re- straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul- der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating posi- tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi- tioned properly across the lower hips or upper thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in- structions for proper use and installa- tion of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation and use.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-36 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Infants and children should never be held on anyones lap. Even the stron- gest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.

Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.

NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, see Forward-facing child restraint in- stallation using the seat belts later in this section.

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seri- ously injure or kill a child. A rear- facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

Child restraint anchor points are de- signed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted.

Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or harnesses.

A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.

Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- sible after fitting the child restraint.

Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child re- straint while in the vehicle.

When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli- sion, loose objects can injure occu- pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating sur- face and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- tem. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- nected to these anchors. For details, see LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- tem later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When se- lecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your childs height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be secured to the designated an- chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only:

2nd row captains chairs (if so equipped)

2nd row bench seat outboard positions only (if so equipped)

LATCH system lower anchor locations - captains chairs

WRS0364

LATCH system lower anchor locations - bench seat

WRS0416

1-38 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc- tions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious in- jury or death of a child or other passen- gers in a sudden stop or collision:

Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.

Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

Inspect the lower anchors by insert- ing your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower an- chors are obstructed.

LATCH lower anchor location LRS0748

LATCH label locations 2nd row captains chairs (if so equipped)

LRS0344

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys- tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child re- straint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the in- structions provided by the child restraint manu- facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench (if so equipped)

LRS0382

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment LRS0662

1-40 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Top tether anchor

WARNING

If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con- tacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, re- move the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.

Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously in- jured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

2nd row captains chairs (if so equipped) LRS2100

2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) LRS2069

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located in the following loca- tions:

2nd row bench (if so equipped) on the floor behind the outboard seating positions as shown.

2nd row captains chairs (if so equipped) on the floor behind the seats as shown.

3rd row bench seat on the floor of the cargo area behind the center seat position as shown.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in- stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- ers instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- erly attached to the lower anchors.

3rd row bench seat LRS0640

Rear-facing web-mounted step 2 WRS0801

1-42 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attach- ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child re- straint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH at- tachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2 WRS0802

Rear-facing step 3 LRS0673

Rear-facing step 4 LRS0674

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front pas- senger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position, both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured. See Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt in this section.

WRS0256

1-44 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in- stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the restraint manufacturers instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers in- structions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing step 1 WRS0256

Rear-facing step 2 WRS0761

Rear-facing step 3 LRS0669

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear-facing step 4 LRS0670

Rear-facing step 5 WRS0762

Rear-facing step 6 WRS0763

1-46 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraints sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- ers instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. See Installing top tether strap in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seat- ing positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is re- moved. See Head restraints in this section for head restraint adjustment information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing web-mounted step 2 WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2 WRS0800

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

4. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attach- ments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to remove any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child re- straint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH at- tachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the opera- tion of the front passenger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

When installing a child restraint system in the rear center position, both the center seat belt connector tongue and buckle tongue must be secured. See Attaching the 3rd row center seat belt in this section.

Forward-facing step 4 LRS0671

Forward-facing step 6 WRS0697

1-48 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety and Child Restraint sections before in- stalling a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there- fore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al- ways follow the child restraint manufactur- ers instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint or headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint or headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint or headrest when the child restraint is removed. See Head restraints or Adjust- able headrest in this section for head re- straint or headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint or headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers in- structions for belt routing.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1

WRS0699

Forward-facing step 3 WRS0680

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). See In- stalling top tether strap in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing step 4 LRS0667

Forward-facing step 5 LRS0668

Forward-facing step 6 WRS0681

1-50 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- fore you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re- straint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing step 8 WRS0698

Forward-facing step 10 WRS0475

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (2nd row captains chairs or 2nd row bench seat [if so equipped] )

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (2nd row captains or bench out- board seating positions only) or the seat belt, as applicable.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head re- straint to position the top tether strap 1 over the top of the seatback. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the child restraint is removed. See

Head restraint adjustment in this section for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point 2 on the floor behind the child re- straint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in- stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

2nd row captains chairs (if so equipped) LRS2100

2nd row bench seat (if so equipped) LRS2069

1-52 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (3rd row bench seat)

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint with a top tether strap can only be used in the center position. Do not place in an outboard seating position and attempt to angle the tether strap to the center position.

The center position of the 3rd row bench seat is the seating position that can use a top tether strap.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt, as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap 1 over the top of the center seating position seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point 2 on the floor behind the child re- straint.

3. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in- stallation procedure steps in this section before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de- tails.

BOOSTER SEATS Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the childs face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.

Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the childs arm.

A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

3rd row bench seat LRS0640

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system.

LRS0455 LRS0453 LRS0464

1-54 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Make sure the childs head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. For example, if a low back booster seat 1 is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the childs ears, a high back booster seat 2 should be used.

If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended pro- cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child Safety, Child Restraint and Booster Seats sections before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rear- most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturers in- structions.

WRS0699

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

3. The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint when the booster seat is removed. See Head restraints in this sec- tion for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the childs hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers in- structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the childs shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc- tions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in Three-point type seat belt with retractor earlier in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat being used. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

Front passenger position LRS0454 WRS0475

1-56 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- tion contains important information concerning the following systems:

Driver and passenger supplemental front- impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- mental air bag

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll- over supplemental air bag

Seat belt with pretensioner

Supplemental front-impact air bag system- :The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- mental air bags: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side impact colli- sions. The supplemental side air bag is designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate and re- main inflated for a short time.

These supplemental restraint systems are de- signed to supplement the crash protection pro- vided by the seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable dis- tance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. See Seat belts earlier in this section for instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 sec- onds if the system is operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

WARNING

The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity fron- tal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of posi- tion in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practi- cal from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt us- age then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an acci- dent. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the steer- ing wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

1-58 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WARNING

Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain and rollover air bags inflate if they are not properly re- strained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

1-60 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An in- flating front air bag could seriously in- jure or kill your child. See Child re- straints earlier in this section for details.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:

The side air bags and curtain and roll- over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear im- pact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256 Do not lean against the door.

WRS0431

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING

The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows. WRS0365

Do not lean against doors or windows. SSS0162

1-62 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially care- ful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

WRS0363 SSS0159

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag inflators

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags

3. Air bag Control Unit (ACU) 4. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules 5. Crash zone sensor 6. Occupant classification system control

unit 7. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor) 8. Seat belt buckle switches 9. Seat belt with pretensioner 10. Satellite sensors 11. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag modules

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, all of the information, cautions and warn- ings in this manual still apply and must be followed.WRS0366

1-64 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may in- flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system opera- tion.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors, occupant clas- sification sensor (pressure sensor) and passen- ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, it additionally monitors the weight of an occupant or object on the seat and seat belt tension. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag

is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section for further details. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owners Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during infla- tion.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 sec- onds if the system is operational.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some con- ditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec- essary for most effective protection. Fail- ure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light is located under the climate controls. After the igni- tion switch is placed in the ON position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instru- ment panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

Unoccupied passengers seat: The is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

Passengers seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as outlined in this section: The illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

Occupied passenger seat and the passen- ger meets the conditions outlined in this section: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passenger air bag is opera- tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classification sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat by weight. It works together with seat belt sensors described later. For example, if a child is in the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regula- tions is on the seat, its weight and the childs weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera- tion can vary depending on the front passenger seat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de- signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and the amount of tension on the seat belt, such as when it is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). Based on the

WRS0475

1-66 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

weight on the seat detected by the occupant classification sensor and the belt tension de- tected on the seat belt, the advanced air bag system determines whether the front passenger air bag should be automatically turned OFF as required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as out- lined in this manual should not cause the passen- ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF; however, if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush- ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupant improperly uses the seat belt in the ALR mode (child restraint mode), this could cause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil- dren be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor and seat belt sensors are designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified

child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode (child restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passen- ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. See Child restraints earlier in this section for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the objects weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front pas- senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light will not illu- minate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The air bag system and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. For example, if a large adult who is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag status light will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area on the drivers side of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING

Do not place any objects on the steer- ing wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- jects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.

Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may se- verely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, sus- pension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.

Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing mate- rial on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifi- cally designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classifica- tion sensor (pressure sensor).

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in seri- ous personal injury.

Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthor- ized electrical test equipment and prob- ing devices should not be used on the air bag system.

A cracked windshield should be re- placed immediately by a qualified re- pair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

1-68 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof- mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll- over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all 3 rows. These systems are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warn- ings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe off roading) may cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions in all rows. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may

cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in- flated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START posi- tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 sec- onds if the system is operational.

WRS0381

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

WARNING

Do not place any objects near the seat- back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems. This is to prevent dam- age to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electrical system, sus- pension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain and rollover air bag systems.

Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seat- backs or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.

Work around and on the side air bag and curtain and rollover air bag systems should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or discon- nected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or cur- tain and rollover air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain and rollover air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front seats)

WARNING

The pretensioners cannot be reused af- ter activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but a pretensioner is not acti- vated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, re- placed by your NISSAN dealer.

No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to pre- vent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

Work around and on the pretensioner system should be done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equip- ment should also be done by a NISSAN dealer. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.

1-70 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If you need to dispose of a pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu- pants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re- leased and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. (See SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT in this section for more de- tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels

The warning labels are located on the sur- face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front- impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WRS0885

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the instrument panel, moni- tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten- sioners and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warn- ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:

The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these supplemental air bag systems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve- hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should al- ways be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Once a front air bag, side air bag, or curtain and rollover air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Addition- ally, the activated pretensioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module and pretensioner cannot be repaired.

The front air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be in- spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

If you need to dispose of a supplemen- tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor- rect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

LRS0100

1-72 SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-13 Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-21

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . 2-30 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-33 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-36 Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-36 Front and rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Instrument panel storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Overhead console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44 2nd row center console (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Power vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Manual vent windows (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56

Console light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 HomeLink universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-58

Programming HomeLink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Operating the HomeLink universal transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61 Reprogramming a single HomeLink button . . . . . . 2-62 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

1. Vents (P. 4-39) 2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-30) 3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control/Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped) (P. 4-94, P. 4-96, 4-111)

4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-33) 5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-57, P. 2-34) 6. Meters, gauges and warning/indicator

lights (P. 2-4, 2-13) 7. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-20) 8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch (P. 2-28, P. 2-29)

9. Ignition switch (P. 5-9) 10. Display screen/Display screen with

navigation system* (if so equipped) (P.4-4, , P. 4-16)

11. Navigation system* controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-16)

12. Audio system controls (P. 4-44) 13. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-57) 14. Glove box (P. 2-41)LIC2435

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Hazard lights (P. 6-2) 16. Climate controls (P. 4-40) 17. Power outlet/cigarette lighter

(accessory) (P. 2-38) 18. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-34) 19. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

switch (P. 5-33) 20. Shift selector (P. 5-14) 21. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-66) 22. Power outlet (P. 2-38) 23. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-27) 24. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-30) 25. Front and rear sonar system off switch

(P. 2-36) 26. Pedal position adjustment switch

(P. 3-31) 27. Headlight aiming control

(if so equipped) (P. 2-30) 28. Power vent window (if so equipped)

(P. 2-53) 29. Lift gate open/close switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-23)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren- theses for operating details.

Instruments and controls 2-3

1. Warning/indicator lights 2. Tachometer 3. Engine coolant temperature gauge 4. Voltmeter 5. Fuel gauge 6. Speedometer

7. Automatic transmission fluid tempera- ture gauge

8. Odometer/Twin trip odometer/Vehicle Information Display

9. Engine oil pressure gauge

WIC1243

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

1. Speedometer 2. Odometer/twin trip display 3. Change button

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve- hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the change button changes the display as follows:

Trip Trip Odometer only

Elapsed time, driving distance and average speed information is also available for vehicles with navigation system (if so equipped). Refer to Control panel buttons in the Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems sec- tion later in this manual.

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec- ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

WIC1502 WIC1245

Instruments and controls 2-5

TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo- lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine into the red zone 1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en- gine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera- ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range 1 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera- ture near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the nor- mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is over- heated, continued operation of the ve- hicle may seriously damage the engine. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergencysection for immediate action required.

WIC1246 LIC1135

2-6 Instruments and controls

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis- ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the drivers side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the ve- hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see Mal- function Indicator Light (MIL) later in this section.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine lubrication sys- tem oil pressure while the engine is running. The needle should be in the middle of the gauge when the engine is running.

LIC1199 LIC1198

Instruments and controls 2-7

CAUTION

This gauge is not designed to indicate low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See Engine oil in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.)

If the gauge needle does not move with the proper amount of engine oil, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Continued vehicle operation in such a condition could cause serious damage to the engine.

VOLTMETER When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the voltmeter indicates the battery volt- age. When the engine is running, it indicates the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop below the normal range. If the needle is not in the normal range (11 15 volts) 1 while the engine is running, it may indicate that the charging system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE GAUGE

This gauge indicates the temperature of the au- tomatic transmission fluid. The automatic trans- mission fluid temperature is in the normal range 1 when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.

LIC1136 WIC1247

2-8 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

This gauge is not designed to indicate low automatic transmission fluid level. Use the dipstick to check the fluid level. (See 5-speed automatic transmission fluid in the Maintenance and do-it- yourself section.)

If the gauge indicates automatic trans- mission fluid temperature over the nor- mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. Contin- ued operation of the vehicle may seri- ously damage the transmission.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in- dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the or button as described in the charts below to activate various features of the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.

Type A

Push and hold

the button for about:

Feature: (Push button again for about 1 sec- ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicator light toggles on/off

11 seconds Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

Type B

Push and hold

the button for about:

Feature: (Push button again for about 1 sec- ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Compass zone can be changed to correct false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare feature, refer to Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror in the Pre-driving checks and adjust- ments section.

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-9

COMPASS DISPLAY

Push the or button for about 1 sec- ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to toggle the compass direction display 1 on or off. The display will indicate the direction that the vehicle is heading.

N: North E: East S: South W: West

If the display reads C, calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle in three complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle on your everyday route. The com- pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three complete circles.

Type A WIC0904

Type B LIC1487

2-10 Instruments and controls

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo- graphical north is known as variance. In some areas, this difference can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. Follow these instructions to set the variance for your particular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about 5 seconds. The current zone number will appear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle through the zone numbers until the desired number appears in the display. Once you have selected a zone number, the display will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the correct direction is not shown, follow this procedure.

WIC0355

Instruments and controls 2-11

1. With the display turned on, press and hold the button for about 10 seconds. The CAL icon in the compass display will illu- minate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle one and a half circles at a maximum speed of 6 MPH (10 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display should return to normal.

If the compass deviates from the correct indication soon after repeated adjustment, have the compass checked at an authorized NISSAN dealer.

The compass may not indicate the correct compass point in tunnels or while driving up or down a steep hill. (The compass returns to the correct compass point when the ve- hicle moves to an area where the geomag- netism is stabilized.)

If a magnet is located in or near the overhead console in the front of the vehicle or the vehicle is driven where the terrestrial mag- netism is disturbed, the compass display may not indicate the correct direction.

CAUTION

Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc., which are attached to the vehicle by means of a magnet. They affect the op- eration of the compass.

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as it may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-12 Instruments and controls

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

4WD warning light ( model) High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic Transmission check warning light Low fuel warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park warning light ( model)

Low tire pressure warning light Security indicator light

or Brake warning light Master warning light Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Tow mode ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Check suspension warning light (if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant tem- perature high warning light

Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights will come on (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go off (if so equipped):

or , , , , ,

,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the electrical system. Have the system repaired promptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Instruments and controls 2-13

WARNING LIGHTS For additional information on warnings and indi- cators, see Vehicle information display later in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- tion is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See Brake system in the Starting and driving sec- tion.

Automatic Transmission check warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, it may indicate the automatic transmission system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Automatic transmission park warning light ( model)

WARNING

If the ATP light is ON, this indicates that the automatic transmission P (Park) po- sition will not function and the transfer case is in neutral.

When parking, always make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light illuminates and the parking brake is set. Failure to engage the transfer position in 2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO could result in the vehicle moving unexpectedly, resulting in serious personal injury or property damage.

The warning light may come on when the ignition switch is ON and the shift selector is placed in the P position while shifting the transfer case be- tween 4H and 4LO. Shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO, 4H, or 4LO position again to turn off the ATP warn- ing light when the warning light comes on. Before shifting the 4WD switch into the 4LO position or out of 4LO in the 4H position, move the shift selector into the N position. Shift the shift selector into the P position and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is ON and the ATP warning light is OFF.

This light indicates that the automatic transmis- sion parking function is not engaged. If the trans- fer control is not secured in any drive position while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position, the transmission will disengage and the drive wheels will not lock.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve- hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. See Brake fluid in the Main- tenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driv- ing could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driv- ing it could be dangerous.

Pressing the brake pedal with the en- gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- tance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked at a NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv- ing and abrupt braking. (See Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light in this section.)

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not func- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable control sys- tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to Variable voltage control system in the Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself section later in this manual.

Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Check suspension warning light (if so equipped)

This light may indicate a malfunction in the auto- leveling suspension.

For additional information, refer to Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

Engine oil pressure low/ Engine coolant temperature high warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure or high engine coolant temperature.

Instruments and controls 2-15

If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine and allow it to cool. If the light remains on after checking the oil and coolant, stop the en- gine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.

This light is not designed to indicate a low oil or low coolant level. Check the oil level with the dipstick and check the coolant level on the reservoir. See Engine oil and Checking engine coolant level in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. Also see If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer- gency section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not cov- ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued op- eration of the vehicle may seriously dam- age the engine. See If your vehicle over- heats in the In case of emergency section for immediate action required.

4WD warning light ( model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni- tion switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. See 4WD warning light in the Starting and driving section.

CAUTION

If the warning light comes on or blinks during operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:

in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the shift selector to the N posi- tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve- nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also appears in the vehicle information dis- play.If you select the tire pressure informa- tion in the display (if so equipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning message will be dis- played. The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom- mended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the drivers door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automati- cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad- justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec- ommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres- sure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, see Vehicle informa- tion display in the Instruments and controls section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section and in the In case of emergency section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section and Tire pressure in the Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself section in this manual.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect elec- trical medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON position, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may per- manently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious ve- hicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label located in the drivers door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

Instruments and controls 2-17

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the mas- ter warning light illuminates if any of the following are displayed on the vehicle information display.

No key warning

Low fuel warning

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

Parking brake release warning

Door/liftgate open warning

Loose fuel cap

Check tire pressure warning

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passengers seat belt is not fastened when the front passengers seat is occupied . For 7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger.

Refer to Seat belts in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warn- ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact air bag , roof-mounted curtain and rollover air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

The supplemental air bag warning light re- mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre- tensioners may not function properly. For addi- tional details see Supplemental restraint sys- tem in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

2-18 Instruments and controls

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and/or pretensioner systems will not op- erate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings and indi- cators, see Vehicle information display later in this section.

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light ( ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation, see Front passenger air bag and status light in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual.

High beam indicator light (blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec- onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See Readiness for

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test in the Tech- nical and consumer information section of this manual.

Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in one of two ways:

Malfunction Indicator Light on steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel- filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

Malfunction Indicator Light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To re- duce or avoid emission control system dam- age:

do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h).

avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

Instruments and controls 2-19

avoid steep uphill grades.

if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav- ing the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission con- trol system.

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the security system equipped on the vehicle is operational.

For additional information, see Security sys- tems later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operating, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery.

Tow mode ON indicator light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the tow mode function is ON.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF, the transfer case is in the 4LO position ( model), or when the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not functioning properly. This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is not oper- ating.

Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will operate normally. See Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system in the Starting and driving sec- tion of this manual.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica- tor light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Key reminder chime A chime sounds if the drivers door is opened while the key is left in the ignition switch. Remove the key and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi- tion, a chime sounds when the drivers door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before leav- ing the vehicle.

The vehicle information display 1 is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

automatic transmission position indicator

cruise control system information

Intelligent Key operation information (if so equipped)

some indicators and warnings

other information

For details about the Intelligent Key, see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section.

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY Press the vehicle information display INFO but- ton 1 located on the instrument panel to toggle through the following modes.

MPG Range Warning

Rotate the INFO button 2 to highlight the de- sired menu option within the selected mode. Press the INFO button 1 to enter the high- lighted menu.

WIC1248 WIC1249

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

Instruments and controls 2-21

The icons at the bottom of the display screen show the options available:

ENTER Press the INFO button to select a highlighted option.

NEXT Rotate the INFO button to high- light an option.

Warning mode

The warning mode can be selected to view any warnings that may be present. Once the screen is selected you have the option of skipping the warning or viewing it in detail.

Warnings can be present for issues such as an open door or low fuel. For more information about potential warnings see Vehicle information dis- play warnings and indicators later in this section.

WIC1166

2-22 Instruments and controls

Vehicle information display warnings and indicators

1. Door and liftgate open warning

2. Lock warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

3. Low fuel warning

4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning

5. No key warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

6. Parking brake warning

7. Shift P warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

8. Cruise main switch indicator

9. Cruise set switch indicator

LIC2005

Instruments and controls 2-23

10. NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

11. Transfer 4LO position indicator ( model)

12. 4WD shift indicator ( model)

13. Automatic transmission position indicator

14. Loose fuel cap warning

15. Check tire pressure waning

Door and liftgate open warning

This warning illuminates when a door, the liftgate or the liftgate glass has been opened when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Lock warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

This warning illuminates and a chime sounds if the ignition switch has been in the ACC or ON position and then placed in the OFF position.

Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the warning and chime will turn off.

Refer to Shift P warning in this section for additional information.

Low fuel warning

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re- serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

This warning illuminates when the windshield- washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield- washer fluid as necessary. See Windshield- washer fluid in the Maintenance and do-it- yourself section of this manual.

No key warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

This warning illuminates following two condi- tions:

1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the system. If this warning illuminates, you can- not start the engine.

Check for the following causes and perform the assigned remedies:

The battery of the Intelligent Key carried with you is discharged completely. Re- place the battery with a new one.

The Intelligent Key carried with you is not registered to the system. Use the regis- tered Intelligent Key.

You do not have an Intelligent Key with you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.

2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. A chime will also sound.

Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

SHIFT P warning (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift selector is in any position other than (Park) posi- tion. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift selector to the P (Park) position or start the engine.

If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position, the lock warning will appear. Refer to Lock warning in this section.

For additional information about Intelligent Key, see NISSAN Intelligent Key in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Cruise main switch indicator

This indicator illuminates when the cruise control main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off when the main switch is pushed again. When the cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop- erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator (NISSAN Intelligent Key model)

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. See Battery replacement in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Transfer 4LO position indicator ( model)

This indicator illuminates when the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position with the ignition switch placed in the ON position.

If the 4WD shift switch is set in the 4LO position and the indicator blinks, stop the vehicle, drive slowly forward and the indicator will turn on.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, stop the vehicle, move the shift selector to the N (Neutral) position, then depress and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.

The transfer case may be damaged if you shift the switch while driving.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift switch between 4H and 4LO unless you have first stopped the vehicle and moved the shift selector to N (Neutral). Make sure the transfer 4LO posi- tion indicator illuminates when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO.

The indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other.

4WD shift indicator ( model)

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- cator will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other.

Automatic transmission position indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this indicator shows the shift selector position. See Driving the vehicle in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. See Fuel-filler cap in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments section.

Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Low tire pressure warning light earlier in this section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

Vehicle security system

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion and remove the key.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with:

the power door lock switch (if the door is opened, locked and then closed).

the key master or mechanical (NISSAN Intelligent Key models).

any request switch (NISSAN Intelligent Key models).

the keyfob or NISSAN Intelligent Key.

Keyfob and NISSAN Intelligent Key opera- tion:

Push the button. All doors lock. The hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked.

When the button is pushed with all doors locked, the hazard lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to Silencing the horn beep feature in the Pre- driving checks and adjustments section or Comfort & Convenience settings in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section.

4. Confirm that the indicator light comes on. The light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The light begins to flash once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm time period, the drivers door is unlocked by the key, a request switch, the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position, the system will not arm.

LIC0559

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-26 Instruments and controls

If the key is turned slowly when locking the drivers door, the system may not arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned beyond the vertical position toward the unlock position to remove the key, the system may be disarmed when the key is removed. If the indicator light fails to glow for a period of time, unlock the door once and lock it again.

Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will arm with all doors closed and locked with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

The headlights blink and the horn sounds intermittently.

The alarm automatically turns off after a pe- riod of time.However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the drivers door with the key, a request switch or by pressing the button on the keyfob or Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

opening a door without using the key, a re- quest switch, keyfob or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by using the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the drivers door with the key, pressing the button on the keyfob or Intelligent Key, or by unlocking all doors with any request switch (Intelligent Key models).

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by an- other registered key, an automated toll road de- vice or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCC Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem (CONT ASSY IMMOBILIZER, ANT ASSY IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow- ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired opera- tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX- PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE- SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID THE USERS AUTHORITY TO OPER- ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve- hicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal- functioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the en- gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser- vice as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting your NISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

1 Intermittent (INT) intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward A (Slower) or B (Faster). Also, the inter- mittent operation speed varies in accor- dance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit- tent operation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the driving speed dependent intermittent wiper func- tion. Refer to Comfort & convenience set- tings in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems sec- tion later in this manual.

2 Low (LO) continuous low speed operation

3 High (HI) continuous high speed opera- tion

Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep opera- tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 5 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

LIC0474 LIC0965

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-28 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer reservoir is empty.

Do not fill the windshield-washer reser- voir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. So methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled with filling the windshield- washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- centrates with water to the manufactur- ers recommended levels before pour- ing the fluid into the windshield-washer reservoir. Do not use the windshield- washer reservoir to mix the windshield- washer fluid concentrate and water.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.

1 Intermittent (INT) intermittent operation (not adjustable)

2 ON continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward 3 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu- tion may freeze on the window and ob- scure your vision. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

Do not operate the washer continu- ously for more than 30 seconds.

Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen- trates at full strength. Some methyl al- cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield- washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reser- voir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

LIC0966

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-29

To defrost the rear window glass and outside mirrors:

Start the engine and push the rear window de- froster switch. The rear window defroster indica- tor light on the display screen comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or dam- age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

1 When turning the switch to the posi- tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights come on.

2 When turning the switch to the posi- tion, the headlights come on and all the other lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC1173

Type A WIC1250

Type B WIC1186

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

2-30 Instruments and controls

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:

Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights au- tomatically when it is dark.

Turn off all the lights when it is light.

Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad- justed. See Comfort & convenience set- tings in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systemssec- tion later in this manual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi- tion 1 .

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain ON for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to

the OFF, , or position.

Type C SIC3019 WIC1251

Instruments and controls 2-31

Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor 1 located in the top side of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicles battery could be- come discharged.

Headlight beam select

1 To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights come on and the light illuminates.

2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while the headlight switch is in the or position, the headlights will turn off after a period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off with the

headlight switch in the or position, the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight switch is moved to the OFF position and then

turned to the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au- tomatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the head- light switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC0836 WIC1252

2-32 Instruments and controls

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM (Canada only) The headlights automatically illuminate at a re- duced intensity when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position or in the position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illumi- nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when the parking brake is released. The daytime run- ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL The instrument brightness control operates when the headlight control switch is in

the , or AUTO position (with auto- lights activated).

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru- ment panel lights when driving at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

1 Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or down to the point where the indicator light begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

The turn signal will flash three times automatically.

WIC1506 WIC1253

Instruments and controls 2-33

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tam- pering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as desired, depending on the temperature. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

WIC1254 LIC2051 WIC1441

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-34 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in se- rious injury.

CAUTION

Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush- ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.

When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- lar materials.

If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

The heated steering wheel system is designed to operate only when the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below approximately 68F (20C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm the steering wheel after the engine starts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is below 68F (20C), the system will heat the steering wheel to approximately 86F (30C), then turn off automatically.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.

LIC0421

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-35

NOTE:

The heated steering wheel switch is equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the switch has been activated for 30 minutes, the system will automatically turn off. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is above 68F (20C) when the switch is turned on, the system will not heat the steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. See Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system in the Starting and driving section.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back- ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

The rear sonar system is active when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position and the shift selector is in R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

LIC1548 LIC0471

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-36 Instruments and controls

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push- ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.

The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

See Rear sonar system in the Starting and driving section.

WARNING

The front sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper driving.

The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper back- ing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

The front sonar system:

is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift selector is in a forward gear position.

a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the front bumper.

The rear sonar system:

is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift selector is in R (Re- verse).

a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 5.9 ft (1.8 m) of the rear bumper.

The front and rear sonar system can be disabled by pushing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push the switch again to enable the system. The indicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

See Front sonar system in the Starting and driving section.

LIC1182

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-37

Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. How- ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode. The indicator light on the tow mode switch illumi- nates when tow mode is selected. Press the tow mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to Tow mode in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion later in this manual.

LIC0594 Front row

LIC1193

TOW MODE SWITCH POWER OUTLET

2-38 Instruments and controls

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

CAUTION

The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.

Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. See your NISSAN dealer for additional information.

Do not use with accessories that ex- ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

Use power outlets with the engine run- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

2nd row LIC0550

Luggage area LIC0551

Instruments and controls 2-39

INSTRUMENT PANEL STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sud- den stop.

CONSOLE BOX

Console box storage trays

Console box storage Pull up on the lever 1 to open the console box lid 2 .

Center stack storage LIC1183 LIC1369 LIC1370

STORAGE

2-40 Instruments and controls

Console box lock Use the master key to lock 1 or unlock 2 the console box.

GLOVE BOX Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the master key when locking 1 or unlocking 2 the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to prevent an accident.

LIC1371 LIC1176 WIC0673

Instruments and controls 2-41

CAUTION

Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.

Do not leave sunglasses in the sun- glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKET The seatback pocket is located on the back of the driver seat. The pocket can be used to store maps.

LIC1195 LIC0575

2-42 Instruments and controls

OVERHEAD CONSOLE Storage bins

WARNING

Keep storage bins closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Push the button to open a storage bin.

Push the lid up to close.

Small bin LIC0568

Medium bin (if so equipped) LIC0569

Large bin LIC0570

Instruments and controls 2-43

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Position the arm on the adjustable cup holder so that the cup is held securely.

To open the 2nd row cup holders (rear of the front console), lower the lid. To close, raise the lid.

Front WIC1507

Adjustable LIC1373

2nd row (rear of front console) LIC0554

2-44 Instruments and controls

2nd row center console (if so equipped) LIC0555

2nd row bench (if so equipped) LIC0556

3rd row LIC0557

Instruments and controls 2-45

CAUTION

Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

2ND ROW CENTER CONSOLE (if so equipped) Pull up on the lever to open the console box lid.

Removing the 2nd row center console box To remove the 2nd row center console box:

1 Lift out the cup holder tray.

2 Pull up on the handle to tilt the console box up.

3 Move the console box toward the front of the vehicle and lift it out.

Bottle holder WIC1197 LIC0576 LIC0577

2-46 Instruments and controls

To reinstall the 2nd row center console box:

1. Slide the console box over the base toward the rear of the vehicle.

2. Push down to lock the console box in place.

3. Replace the cup holder tray.

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN To open the cargo area storage bin, pull down on the tab and pull the lid off.

CAUTION

Placing additional items in the area speci- fied for the jack may dent body panel or damage power back door assembly (if so equipped).

LIC0571 LIC2014

Instruments and controls 2-47

To access the floor storage area, push down 1 to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle 2 to lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.

Never allow anyone to ride in the lug- gage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seri- ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Side finisher When hooking on ropes, do not apply a load of more than 55 lb (245 N) to a single A hook or 44 lb (196 N) to a single B hook.

LIC0572 LTI0089

2-48 Instruments and controls

Floor hooks Do not apply a load of more than 110 lb (490 N) to a single hook.

ROOF RACK

LTI0090

LIC1177

Instruments and controls 2-49

WARNING

Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof rack.

Heavy loading of the roof rack has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or abnor- mal handling maneuvers.

Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.

Do not exceed maximum roof rack load weight capacity.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing items from the roof rack. If you cannot comfort- ably lift the items onto the roof rack from the ground, use a ladder or stool.

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof rack. Do not load more than 200 lbs (91 kg) on entire roof rack. Be sure load is evenly distributed across both crossbars. Be careful that your ve- hicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located on the drivers door pillar). For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to Vehicle loading information in the Technical and con- sumer information section later in this manual.

The crossbars can be adjusted forward and backward. Loosen the thumbwheel 1 and ad- just the crossbar to the desired position. Tighten the thumbwheel. Place your luggage on the bars and secure the luggage with rope to the utility loops 2 . Do not place luggage on the side rails or tie rope directly to the side rails. Always be sure the thumbwheels are fully tightened to keep the crossbar in place. Do not use utility loops for any purpose other than securing luggage.

LIC1200

2-50 Instruments and controls

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls and become trapped in a window. Unattended chil- dren could become involved in serious accidents.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the drivers or passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button 2. Power door lock switch 3. Front passenger side automatic switch 4. Right rear passenger window switch 5. Left rear passenger window switch 6. Driver side automatic switch

Drivers side power window switch The drivers side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold it down. To close a window, pull the switch and hold it up. To stop the opening or closing function at any time, simply release the switch.

LIC1181

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-51

Front passengers power window switch The passengers window switch operates only the corresponding passengers window. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up 2 .

Rear power window switch The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold it down 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up 2 .

Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is depressed, only the drivers side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, press the switch down while the window is closing.

WIC1237 WIC1255 LIC0410

2-52 Instruments and controls

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window oc- curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicles battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. If this occurs, please contact the dealer to re-initialize the power window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately low- ered.

When power window switch does not operate If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the fol- lowing procedure to initialize the power window system:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.

If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure, see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

POWER VENT WINDOWS (if so equipped) Use the vent window switch located on the driv- ers side of the instrument panel to open and close the power vent windows. The windows cannot be operated separately.

To open the power vent windows press and hold the switch.

To close the windows pull up and hold the switch.

LIC1417

Instruments and controls 2-53

The power vent windows operate when the igni- tion switch is placed in the ON position, or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the drivers or passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the vent windows is cancelled.

MANUAL VENT WINDOWS (if so equipped) To open a manual vent window, pull the latch handle toward you until it releases.

To lock the window in the open position, push the latch handle rearward until it locks.

To close a manual vent window, pull the latch handle toward you and push the rear portion of the latch toward the rear of the vehicle until it locks.

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The auto- matic moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the drivers door or the front passengers door is opened during this period of time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof To fully open the moonroof, push the switch to- ward the open position 3 .

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch toward the close position 4 .

LIC0524 WIC0812

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-54 Instruments and controls

To open or close the moonroof part way, push the switch in any direction 5 while the moonroof is sliding open or closed to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt the moonroof up, push the tilt switch to- ward the up position 1 . When the moonroof is open, it will automatically close and then tilt up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the tilt switch toward the down position 2 .

Restarting the moonroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable after the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri- cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality detected. Use the following reset procedure to return moonroof operation to normal.

1. If the moonroof lid is open, push the tilting switch repeatedly toward the down position 2 to fully close the lid.

2. Push and hold the tilting switch for more than 2 seconds toward the down position 2 to reestablish the lids home position.

The moonroof should now operate normally.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto- matic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof will immediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im- mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re- peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds after it happens; the moonroof will fully close gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the moonroof.

WARNING

In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.

Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening.

Do not place heavy objects on the moonroof or surrounding area.

Instruments and controls 2-55

Sunshade Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- ward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the moonroof.

The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 1 , the interior lights illuminate, regardless of door posi- tion. The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is in the ON position.

When the switch is in the DOOR position 2 , the interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped) will stay on for a period of time when:

The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

The drivers door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is activated when:

The drivers door is locked by the keyfob, a key, or the power door lock switch.

The ignition switch is placed in the ON po- sition.

When the switch is in the OFF position 3 , the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position. The puddle lights (if so equipped) come on when any front or rear passenger door is opened.

The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the bat- tery from becoming discharged.

LIC0585

INTERIOR LIGHT

2-56 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

The footwell lights (if so equipped) and door step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming dis- charged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT The console light 1 will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted with the illumination brightness control.

The personal lights on the overhead console can be swiveled 360 degrees. To turn on the light, press the button. Press the button again to turn off the light.

LIC0587 LIC0588

PERSONAL LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-57

To turn the map lights on, press the switches. To turn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three- position switch. To operate, push the switch to the desired position.

ON: The light is illuminated.

Normal (center) position: The light illuminates when the lift gate or glass hatch is opened. The light turns off when the lift gate or glass hatch is closed.

OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless of lift gate position or lock status.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and se- curity systems.

Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehi- cles battery is discharged or is discon- nected, HomeLink will retain all program- ming.

When the HomeLink Universal Trans- ceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming proce- dures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to Program- ming HomeLink later in this section.

LIC0586 LIC0590

MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-58 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use the HomeLink Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and re- verse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards be- came effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga- rage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features in- creases the risk of serious injury or death.

During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio- frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit- ter 13 inches (28 cm) away from the HomeLink surface, keeping the HomeLink indicator light 1 in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and handheld transmitter button. DO NOT re- lease until the HomeLink indicator light 1 flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indi- cates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the Programing HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers section.

LIC2365

Instruments and controls 2-59

3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light 1 is solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should acti- vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

If the indicator light 1 blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.

Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the learnor smartbutton (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door openers manual.

5. Press and release the learn or smart but- ton.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink button for two seconds and release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to complete the training process. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having diffi- culty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- 3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit- ter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to tim- eout in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Training procedures, replace Programming HomeLink Step 2 with the fol- lowing:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

1. See Programing HomeLink step 1 earlier in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. During train- ing, your hand-held transmitter may auto- matically stop transmitting. Continue to

LIC2366

2-60 Instruments and controls

press and hold the desired HomeLink but- ton while you press and re-press (cycle) your hand-held transmitter every two sec- onds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indi- cates successful training. Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the pro- gramming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the pro- grammed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The amber indica- tor light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- DIAGNOSIS If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand- held transmitter information:

replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface.

press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- ruption.

position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed, see Reprogramming a single HomeLink button in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink - Step 1.

Instruments and controls 2-61

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but- ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with Program- ming HomeLink - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 18003553515.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manu- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer- sal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, in- cluding interference that may cause unde- sired operation of the device.

2-62 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 3-7 How to use remote keyless entry system . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

NISSAN Intelligent Key (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 NISSAN Intelligent Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Operating the manual liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-24 Cancel switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Glass hatch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Pedal position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

1. Two master keys (black) with transpon- der chip and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on one side

2. Valet key (black) with transponder chip 3. Key number plate 4. Transponder chip A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can duplicate it.

1. Two Intelligent Keys 2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent

Keys) 3. Key number plate NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY (if so equipped) Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicles Intel- ligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im- mobilizer System components.

WPD0128 WPD0427

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi- lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registra- tion process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelligent Key:

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem- peratures exceed 140F (60C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key, which can be used in case of a discharged bat- tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation in the same way as an ordinary key.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

See Doors in this section and Storage in the Instruments and controlssection of this manual.

Valet hand-off When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me- chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box or console box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedure below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli- gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box or console box with the mechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.

See Storage in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for the console box lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli- cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be- cause the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors can not be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally open- ing the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 1 of the vehicle locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From that position, returning the key to neutral 3 (where the key can only be removed and inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors 4 .

Opening and closing windows The drivers door key operation allows you to open and close windows equipped with auto- matic operation at the same time.

To open the windows, turn the drivers door key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

To close the windows, turn the drivers door key toward the front of the vehicle for longer than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Drivers side LPD0240

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the lock position 1 , then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position 2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front passengers side) to the lock position 1 . When locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (drivers or front passengers side) to the unlock position 2 .

Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (drivers or front passengers side) is moved to the lock

position with the key in the ignition switch and any door open, all doors will lock and then unlock automatically. This helps to prevent the keys from being accidently locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

All doors unlock automatically when the ig- nition is placed in the OFF position (models with Intelligent Key system) or when the key is removed from the ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key system).

The automatic unlock function can be de- activated or activated.To deactivate or acti- vate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, push and hold the power door lock switch to the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once.

Inside lock LPD0241 WPD0381

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again between each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deac- tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position (models with Intelligent Key system) or when the key is re- moved from the ignition switch (models without Intelligent Key system). To unlock the door manu- ally, use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch (drivers or front passengers side).

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac- turer for the possible influences before use.

The remote keyless entry keyfob trans- mits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The FAA advises radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and com- munication systems. Do not operate the remote keyless entry keyfob while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn on the interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped), and activate the panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.

Some settings for the keyfob, such as horn beep, can be adjusted. For vehicles without navigation system, refer to Silencing the horn beep feature later in this section. For vehicles with navigation system, refer to Comfort & convenience set- tings in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section later in this manual.

LPD0420

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Be sure to remove the key from the vehicle before locking the doors.

The keyfob can operate at a maximum distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one vehicle. For information concerning the purchase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a NISSAN dealer.

The keyfob will not function when:

the battery is discharged.

the distance between the vehicle and the keyfob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when the key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the keyfob:

Do not allow the keyfob, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the keyfob.

Do not strike the keyfob sharply against another object.

Do not change or modify the keyfob.

Wetting may damage the keyfob. If the keyfob gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not place the keyfob for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

Do not attach the keyfob with a key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the keyfob near equip- ment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and per- sonal computers.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- ommends erasing the ID code of that key- fob. This will prevent the keyfob from un- authorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing proce- dure, please contact a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the keyfob. All the doors lock. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once to indicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the button is pressed with all doors locked, the hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once as a re- minder that the doors are already locked.

If a door is open and you press the button, the doors will lock but the horn will not beep and the hazard warning lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For vehicles without navigation system, refer to Silencing the horn beep feature later in this section. For ve- hicles with navigation system, refer to Comfort & convenience settings in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition system sec- tion of this manual. Unlocking doors

Press the button on the keyfob once.

Only the drivers door unlocks.

The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed with the ignition switch in any position except the ON posi- tion.

The interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped) turn on and the light timer acti- vates for a period of time when the interior light switch is in the DOOR position with the ignition switch in any position except the ON position.

Press the button on the keyfob again within 5 seconds.

All doors unlock.

The hazard warning lights flash once if all doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without wait- ing by inserting the key into the ignition switch and placing it in the ON or START position, locking the doors with the keyfob or pushing the interior light switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the keyfob is pressed, all doors will lock automatically within 1 minute unless one of the following operations is per- formed:

Any door is opened.

A key is inserted into the ignition switch and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

Opening windows The keyfob allows you to open windows equipped with automatic operation simultane- ously.

To open the windows, press the but- ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec- onds after all doors are unlocked.

LPD0210

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

The door windows will open while pressing the button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the keyfob.

Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) Press and hold the button on the keyfob for about 0.5 seconds to open or close the liftgate. The hazard warning lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power open or power close se- quence has started.

The liftgate will reverse direction immediately during power open or power close if the keyfob button is pressed. A chime will sound to an- nounce the reversal.

For more information, see Liftgate later in this section.

Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the button on the keyfob for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

it has run for a period of time, or

any button is pressed on the keyfob.

LPD0243 LPD0211

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the keyfob once to turn on the interior lights and puddle lights (if so equipped).

For additional information, refer to Interior light in the Instruments and controls section in this manual.

Silencing the horn beep feature If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti- vated using the keyfob.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the keyfob, the display screen (if so equipped) will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre- vious mode and re-enable the display screen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si- lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

LPD0262

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac- turer for the possible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communi- cation systems. Do not operate the In- telligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unin- tentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks using the remote controller function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.

Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel- ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ- mental conditions may interfere with the opera- tion of the Intelligent Key under the following operating conditions.

When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, and CB radio.

When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.

When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.

When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal com- puter.

When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the batterys life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis- charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel- ligent Key indicator will illuminate after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig- nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat- tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat- tery, see Battery replacement in the Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

For models with a steering wheel lock mecha- nism: Because the steering wheel is locked elec- trically, unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely dis- charged. Unlocking the steering wheel is impos- sible even if the Intelligent Key is inserted into the ignition switch. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY (if so equipped)

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur- rences which will damage the Intelligent Key:

Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.

Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where tem- peratures exceed 140F (60C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli- gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch 1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operat- ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch 1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli- gent Key is outside the vehicle.

After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

SPA2038 WPD0375

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.

Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch within the range of opera- tion.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and make sure you carry the Intelli- gent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside buzzer sounds twice.

WPD0411 WPD0412

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

NOTE:

Doors lock with the door handle request switch while the ignition switch is not in the LOCK position.

Doors do not lock by pushing the door handle request switch while any door is open. However, doors lock with the me- chanical key even if any door is open.

Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with an- other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the re- quest switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the rear liftgate opener switch.

When locking the doors using the re- quest switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession be- fore operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

The request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been de- tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the drivers side door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli- gent Key is in the same hand that is oper- ating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side the glove box or a storage bin.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side the door pockets.

When the Intelligent Key is placed in- side or near metallic materials.

WPD0413

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors 1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch again within 30 seconds to unlock all doors.

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the power liftgate handle or press the power liftgate button.

3. Power back door open.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after return- ing the door handle, push the door handle re- quest switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch.

Opening any door.

Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations.

Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion.

Locking the doors with the remote controller.

Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance de- pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

WPD0412 WPD0413

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

The remote keyless entry function will not func- tion under the following conditions:

When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.

When the doors or the rear liftgate are open or not closed securely.

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli- gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent Key.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli- gent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.

WPD0359

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec- onds to unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button:

Opening any doors.

Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:

Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion.

Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic opera- tion.

To open the windows, press the but- ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drive positioner memory If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory setting.

See Automatic drive positioner in this section.

WPD0360

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Releasing the rear liftgate

Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec- onds to open the rear liftgate. The rear liftgate release button will not operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Using the panic alarm If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

It has run for a period of time, or

Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

The request switch on the driver or passen- ger door has been pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

WPD0414 WPD0415

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti- vated using the Intelligent Key.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the display screen (if so equipped) will not show the current mode and cannot be used to change the mode. Use the Intelligent Key to return to the previous mode and re-enable the display screen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si- lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex- pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

See the Troubleshooting guide in this section and Vehicle information display in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.WPD0362

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis- play and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The shift selector is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

When opening the drivers door to get out of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The NO KEY warning appears on the dis- play and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift selector is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion and place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you. A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely. The door handle request switch is pushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch after the door is closed.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1 Pull the hood lock release handle located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.

2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the side as illustrated with your fingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Fail- ure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.

If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING

Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from open- ing while driving.

Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Ex- haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate.

LPD0244

HOOD LIFTGATE

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

OPERATING THE MANUAL LIFTGATE (if so equipped) The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors including the liftgate simultane- ously.

To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down se- curely.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power lift- gate, the shift selector must be in P (Park). Also, the power liftgate will not operate if battery voltage is low. Additionally, the glass hatch must be fully closed in order to open, close or reverse the power liftgate.

Power Open: The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in

approximately 5 8 seconds. The power open feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob, the instrument panel switch and by the outside opener handle. The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power open sequence has been started.

The liftgate can be opened by the instrument panel switch and the keyfob even if the ve- hicle is locked. The liftgate will individually unlock and open. Once the liftgate is closed, its lock will align to the vehicles lock or unlock status.

LPD0245 Rear pillar switch

LPD0247

Instrument panel switch LPD0283

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec- ond before the liftgate opens.

The liftgate must be unlocked to open it with the outside opener handle.

The switch on the rear pillar cannot be used to open the liftgate.

A warning chime will sound if the shift selector is moved out of P (Park) during a power open operation.

Power Close: The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully open position to the secondary position. When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi- tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close takes approximately 7 10 seconds. The power close feature can be activated by the switch on the keyfob, the instrument panel and the rear pillar. The hazard lights flash and a chime sounds to indicate the power close sequence has been started.

If the outside opener handle is activated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch.

The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec- ond before the liftgate closes.

The switch on the rear pillar can only be used to close the liftgate if the cancel switch is not in the on position.

Reverse: The power liftgate will reverse direction immedi- ately during power open or power close if the keyfob, instrument panel or rear pillar switch is pushed or if the outside handle is lifted. A chime will sound to announce the reversal.

Auto Reverse: If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open or full close position. If a second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the drive motor will disengage. The liftgate will enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close, the liftgate will reverse direc- tion and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi- ately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the lift gate.

Manual Mode: If power operation is not available, the liftgate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if the cancel switch is in the on position, if multiple obstacles have been de- tected in a single power cycle, or if battery volt- age is low.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Safe Mode: If the liftgate gas stays 1 lose pressure, the power liftgate safe mode is activated. When the safe mode is activated, the liftgate slowly closes. A continuous warning chime sounds until the liftgate is in the fully down position. Then the liftgate will be pulled to the closed and latched position by a motor.

The power liftgate cannot be opened using the switches at any time in the safe mode.

The auto reverse function remains active while the liftgate is closing in the safe mode.

Do not operate the liftgate again until it is checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

If the power lift gate does not stay open or if the lift gate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds, do not operate the lift gate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the lift gate gas stays. Have the lift gate inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

Do not activate the power lift gate if one or both of the lift gate gas stays are removed. Damage to the lift gate or power lift gate mechanisms may occur. CANCEL SWITCH

Push the switch toward the CANCEL position to disable the rear pillar switch. The liftgate can still be opened and closed using the switch on the instrument panel and keyfob. The liftgate can also be opened manually with the outside handle if the liftgate is unlocked.

LPD0250 LPD0248

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LIFTGATE RELEASE

WARNING

Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from open- ing while driving.

Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Ex- haust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

CAUTION

If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds, do not operate the lift- gate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate gas stays. Have the liftgate inspected by a NISSAN dealer.

Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate gas stays are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate mechanisms may occur.

Manual liftgate (if so equipped) If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked with the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a discharged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift- gate.

2. Move the lever up to lock or down to unlock.

Power liftgate (if so equipped) If the liftgate cannot be opened with the door lock switch or keyfob due to a discharged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover on the inside of the lift- gate.

2. Move the lever up to open the liftgate.

Manual liftgate release LPD0251

Power liftgate release LPD0252

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

To open, pull up on the smaller outside handle to release the glass hatch, then pull up on the glass hatch. To close, lower and push the glass hatch down securely.

NOTE:

The liftgate must be unlocked in order to open the glass hatch.

WARNING

Do not drive with the glass hatch open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See Exhaust gas in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain condi- tions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emis- sion control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.

LPD0246

GLASS HATCH FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:

Always place the container on the ground when filling.

Do not use electronic devices when filling.

Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are fill- ing it.

Use only approved portable fuel con- tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on up to E-85 fuel. Fuel system or other damage can occur if up to E-85 fuel is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85 fuel. For further information see the Fuel rec- ommendation in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap- pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. Failure to tighten the fuel- filler cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunc- tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle in- spected by a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) in the Instruments and Controls section in this manual.

If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 1 while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel- filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

LPD0391

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

Loose Fuel Cap warning The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as pre- viously described as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the INFO button A on the instrument panel located behind the steering wheel for about 1 second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning B after tightening the fuel- filler cap.

For additional information, see Fuel recommen- dation and Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel rec- ommendation in the Technical and consumer information section in this manual.

TILT OPERATION

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Pull the lock lever forward and hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or down to the desired posi- tion.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel in place.

LRS2005 WPD0428

STEERING WHEEL

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad- justed for driving comfort.

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the brake and accelerator pedal position away from the driver 1 or toward the driver 2 .

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be ad- justed separately.

WARNING

Do not adjust the pedal position while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with your foot on the pedal.

WPD0429

WPD0344

PEDAL POSITION ADJUSTMENT SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

1 To block glare from the front, swing down the main sun visor.

2 To block glare from the side, remove the main sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side.

3 To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed.

CAUTION

Do not store the sun visor before return- ing the extension to its original position.

Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The night position 1 reduces glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 2 when driving in daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces- sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

WPD0307 WPD0126

MIRRORS

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) The inside mirror is designed so that it automati- cally dims during night time conditions and ac- cording to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto- matic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors 1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A

With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi- tion, press the button as described:

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature, press the button again. The indicator light will turn on.

The indicator light will illuminate when the auto- matic anti-glare feature is operating.

For more information about the compass and compass features 2 (if so equipped), see Compass display in the Instruments and con- trols section of this manual.

Type A LPD0446

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Type B and Type C The indicator light 2 will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

the O button for inside mirrors without compass.

the button for inside mirrors with compass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again, press:

the | button for inside mirrors without compass.

the button for inside mirrors with compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

Some vehicles are also equipped with automatic anti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa- tion, see Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors in this section.

For information on HomeLink Universal Trans- ceiver operation, see the HomeLink Universal Transceiver in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if so equipped), see Compass display in the Instru- ments and controls section of this manual.

Type B - Without compass LPD0469

Type C - With compass LPD0470

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.

Rotate the round switch 1 to select the right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired po- sition pushing the round switch.

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so equipped) Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

LPD0418 LPD0259

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

Power folding outside mirrors (if so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power folding mirrors. Manually folding the mirrors can damage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

If one of the mirrors are manually operated or bumped, the mirror body can become loose at the pivot point. To correct electronic mirror op- eration, cycle the mirrors by pushing the CLOSE switch until completely closed, then

push the OPEN switch until the mirrors are in the open position.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirror (Drivers side only) (if so equipped) The outside mirror will automatically dim during nighttime conditions to reduce the glare from the headlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti- glare feature operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on when starting the vehicle. The indicator light on the automatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operat- ing.

To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the button on the rearview mirror. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the anti-glare feature again, press the button on the rearview mirror. The in- dicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear- view mirror, see Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror earlier in this section.

Heated mirrors The outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi- tional information, see Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

LPD0417

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The automatic drive positioner system has two features:

Memory storage function

Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the drivers seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory sys- tem.

1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) posi- tion.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

3. Adjust the drivers seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional infor-

mation, see Seats in the SafetySeats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- tem section of this manual and Pedal posi- tion adjustment and Outside mirrors ear- lier in this section.

During this step, do not place the ignition switch in any position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approxi- mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. After the indicator light goes off, the se- lected positions are stored in the selected memory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memory position Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- ing procedure:

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- tion.

LPD0419

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

2. While the indicator light for the memory switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- onds, press the button on the keyfob. The indicator light will blink. After the indica- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that memory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch or the ignition switch is moved to OFF, press the button on the keyfob. The drivers seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mir- rors will move to the memorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to the memory switch, the keyfob automatically re-links.

Confirming memory storage

Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the SET switch. If the main memory has not been stored, the indicator light will come on for approximately 0.5 seconds. When the memory has stored the position, the indicator light will stay on for approxi- mately 5 seconds.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the memory storage function will be canceled and must be restarted before a stored memory position can be set again. Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to restart the memory storage function. You can also restart the memory storage function using the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse.

2. Open and close the drivers door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

Once the memory storage function has been restarted, you can store a memory position. See Memory storage function in this sec- tion.

Selecting the memorized position

Set the shift selector to the P (Park) position, then:

Within 45 seconds of opening the drivers door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or

Place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the memory switch (1 or 2).

The drivers seat, accelerator and brake pedals, and outside mirrors will move to the memorized

position with the indicator light blinking, and then the light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the drivers seat will automatically move when the shift selector is placed in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the drivers seat more easily.

The drivers seat will slide backward:

When the key is removed from the ignition switch and the drivers door is opened.

When the drivers door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to LOCK with the drivers door open.

The drivers seat will return to the previous posi- tion:

When the key is inserted into the ignition switch and the drivers door is closed.

When the drivers door is closed with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.

When the ignition switch is turned from ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can- celed. For vehicles with navigation system, see Comfort & convenience settings in the Moni- tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual. For vehicles without navigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.

Restarting the entry/exit function If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled. Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to restart the entry/exit function. You can also restart the entry/exit function using the following proce- dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace the fuse.

2. Open and close the drivers door more than 2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SYSTEM OPERATION The automatic drive positioner system will not work or will stop operating under the following conditions:

When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h).

When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

When the adjusting switch for the drivers seat is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.

When the seat has been already moved to the memorized position.

When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.

When the shift selector is moved from P (Park) to any other position.

When the drivers door remains open more than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is not in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can be adjusted and canceled. For vehicles with naviga- tion system, see Comfort & convenience set- tings in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section of this manual. For vehicles without navigation system, see your NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

MEMO

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Control panel buttons color screen without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Control panel buttons color screen with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Image viewer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Using the image viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

How to park with predicted course lines. . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Difference between predicted and actual distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36 How to adjust the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42

Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player Operation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . 4-76 USB interface (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79 USB interface (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 iPod* player operation without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 iPod* player operation with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87 Bluetooth streaming audio (if so equipped) . . . . . . 4-90 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System without Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-100 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101 List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103

Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113 Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115 Handset phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-118 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-119 Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120 Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121 Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122

NISSAN Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-122

NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-123 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126 Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126 Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126 NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140 Speaker Adaptation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-142

Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-144

WARNING

Positioning of the heating or air condi- tioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in or- der that full attention may be given to the driving operation.

Do not disassemble or modify this sys- tem. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.

Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately and contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock.

1. STATUS button (P. 4-6)

2. NISSAN controller (P. 4-5)

3. INFO button (P. 4-6)

4. BRIGHT + (brightness control) button

5. OFF brightness control button (P. 4-15)

6. DISPLAY button (P. 4-9)

7. BRIGHT (brightness control) button

8. SETTING button (P. 4-9)

9. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-5)

LHA2442

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.

To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.

Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button This is a button on the control panel.

Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown on the display. These keys can only be selected using the NISSAN controller.

HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on the display screen. Highlight an item on the dis- play using the main directional buttons 2 or the center dial 3 . Then press the ENTER button 1 to select the item or perform the action.

The BACK button 4 has two functions:

Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button 4 during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen.

Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button 4 accepts the changes made during setup.

WHA0883

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis- play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec- tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different areas on the screen provide you with important information. See the following for details:

1. Header: Shows the path used to get to the current screen (for example, press the SETTING button > then select the Clock key, then select the Time Zone key).

2. Menu Selections: Shows the options to choose within that menu screen (for example, Pacific time zone, Mountain time zone, etc.).

3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator: Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and select more options.

4. Screen Count: Shows the number of menu selections avail- able for that screen (for example, 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line: Provides more information (if available) about the menu selection currently high- lighted (for example, Manually set the time zone).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON To display the status of the audio, climate control system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS button.

The following information will appear when the STATUS button is pressed multiple times:

Audio Audio and climate control system Audio and fuel consumption Audio

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button. The display screen shows vehicle information for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. See the following for details.

LHA1300 WHA1149

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller to display Average Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty and Fuel Economy History.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis- play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con- tinue to be displayed.

When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset. The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi (500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key, then select the Reset key using the NISSAN controller.

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the Fuel Economy key, then select the View key using the NISSAN controller.

The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous reset-to-reset period.

LHA1301 LHA0922

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte- nance key using the NISSAN controller; the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the Reminder keys (Engine Oil, Oil Filter, Tire or Other Reminder) using the NISSAN controller to display the screen to change the maintenance interval.

Select the Interval key using the NISSAN con- troller. Use the NISSAN controller to change the maintenance interval. To accept the changes, press the BACK button.

Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi (km), select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller.

Displaying the maintenance notice re- minder

Select the Interval Reminder ON key to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati- cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica- tor light will illuminate when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au- tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The ignition switch is placed in the ON po- sition the next time the vehicle is driven.

LHA1302 LHA1303 LHA0839

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To return to the previous display after the MAIN- TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met:

The Reset key is selected.

The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF (indicator light not illuminated).

The maintenance interval is set again.

HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set- tings screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set.

Audio settings For audio settings, refer to Audio System in this section.

Display settings Select the Display key. The Display settings screen will appear.

This settings screen can also be accessed di- rectly by pressing the DISPLAY button on the control panel.

LHA1304 LHA0929

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Brightness/contrast:

Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con- trast to lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the Display ON key. The amber indicator next to Display ON turns off and the message above will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button on the control panel is operated, the dis- play turns on for that operation. If one of the control panel buttons is pressed, the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto- matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on:

Press the SETTING button, select the Dis- play key and then select the Display ON key. Then set the screen to on by pressing the ENTER button, or

Hold the OFF button for approxi- mately 2 seconds and the message resum- ing displaywill appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on (no am- ber indicator).

Background color:

Select the Background Color key; the display color changes between day and night.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

LHA0930 WHA0823

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Switch beeps settings Select the Switch Beeps key to adjust the switch beeps settings.

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed.

Camera settings Select the Camera key. The Camera settings screen will appear.

When this option is on (indicator light illumi- nated), predictive course lines will be displayed when the RearView monitor is displayed on the screen. See RearView Monitor in this section for more information.

Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button, then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi- nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12h (12-hour) clock display or the 24h (24-hour) clock display.

LHA1305 LHA1306 LHA1307

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi- nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the daylight savings time, touch the ON key; the amber indicator light will go out.

Time Zone:

Select the Time Zone key; the Time Zone screen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending on the current location, by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light will illuminate for that location).

Pacific

Mountain

Central

Eastern

Atlantic

Newfoundland

Aleutian

Hawaii

Alaska

LHA0933

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Adjust Clock:

To adjust the time, select the + or - key for the hour until the desired number is reached. Repeat the process for the minutes on the line below.

To accept the changes made and return to the Clocks Settings screen, select the OK key.

Comfort & Convenience settings Select the Comfort & Conv. key by using the NISSAN controller. The comfort and conve- nience option screen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions by highlighting the desired item using the NISSAN controller. The amber indicator (box at the right of the selected item) alternately turns on and off each time the ENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated ON

Indicator light is not illuminated OFF

Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer from 0-, 30-, 45-, 60-, 90-, 120-, 150- and 180-second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati- cally according to the vehicle speed.

LHA1308 WHA1151 WHA1152

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Selective Door Unlock: When this item is turned on, only the drivers door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the drivers or front passengers side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn on or turn off the drivers seat moving backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition switch to the ACC position, the drivers seat moves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default: Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings.

Language / Units Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan- guage / Units key. Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller.

LHA0934

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Select Language:

Select the English key, the Franais key or the Espaol key to change the language shown on the display.

Select Units:

Select the US (mi, F, MPG) key or the Metric (km, C, L/100 km) key to change the units shown on the display.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press the OFF button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display. The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller.

Press and hold the OFF button for more than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the button again to turn the display on.

LHA0935 LHA0936

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

1. DEST button*

2. NISSAN controller (P. 4-17)

3. ROUTE button*

4. OFF brightness control button (P. 4-30)

5. DISPLAY button (P. 4-23)

6. INFO button (P. 4-20)

7. SETTING button (P. 4-23)

8. PHONE button**

9. VOICE button*

10. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-17)

11. STATUS button (P. 4-19)

12. MAP button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

**For information on the PHONE button, see Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button This is a button on the control panel.

Example Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen or using the NISSAN controller.

LHA2443

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO USE THE NISSAN CONTROLLER Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on the display screen. Highlight an item on the dis- play using the main directional buttons 2 (cer- tain Navigation System functions use the addi- tional directional buttons 6 ) or the center dial 3 . Then press the ENTER button 1 to select the item or perform the action.

The BACK button 4 has two functions:

Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button 4 during setup, the setup will be canceled and/or the display will return to the previous screen.

Finish setup.

In some screens, pressing the BACK button 4 accepts the changes made during setup.

For the VOICE button 5 functions, refer to the separate Navigation System Owners Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION

The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.

To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.

Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions can- not be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be grayed out or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper- ate the navigation system.

WARNING

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.

Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LHA0882

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Touch screen operation With this system, the same operations as those for the NISSAN controller are possible using the touch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. To select the Naviga- tion key, touch the Navigation key 1 on the screen. Touch the BACK key 2 to return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item:

Touch the + key 1 or the key 2 to adjust the settings of an item.

Touch the up arrow 3 to scroll up the page one item at a time, or touch the double up arrow 4 to scroll up an entire page.

Touch the down arrow 5 to scroll down the page one item at a time, or touch the double down arrow 6 to scroll down an entire page.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number key 1 .

There are some options available when inputting characters.

Uppercase: Shows uppercase characters.

Lowercase: Shows lowercase characters.

Space: Inserts a space.

LHA1227 LHA1228 LHA1230

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Delete: Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the Delete key to delete all of the characters.

OK: Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de- tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis- play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec- tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different areas on the screen provide you with important information. See the following for details.

1. Header: Shows the path used to get to the current screen (for example, press the SETTING button > then select the Comfort key).

2. Menu Selections: Shows the options to choose within that menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu- mination, etc.).

3. Up/Down Movement Indicator: Shows that the NISSAN controller may be used to move up or down on the screen and select more options.

4. Screen Count: Shows the number of menu selections avail- able for the current menu, even if they are on multiple pages (for example, 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line: Provides more information (if available) about the menu selection currently high- lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when unlocking doors).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS BUTTON The STATUS button is used to display system infor- mation. Three different split screens of information are available. Press the STATUS button multiple times to cycle through these screens as follows:

Audio with Turn Information for Navigation Audio with Fuel Economy Information Audio with Climate Control Information Audio with Turn Information for Navigation

LHA1229

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Press the INFO button; the display screen shows vehicle and navigation information for your con- venience.

The information shown on the screen should be a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. See the following for details:

Fuel economy

Press the INFO button, then select the Fuel Economy key using the NISSAN controller to display Distance to Empty, Average Fuel Economy and Fuel Economy History.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides you with an estimation of the distance that can be driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

If the amount of fuel added while the ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis- play just before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position may con- tinue to be displayed.

When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based on fuel consumption since the last reset. The display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi (500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery cables, the display might show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the Fuel Economy key, then select the Reset Fuel Eco key using the NISSAN controller.

LHA1231 LHA1232

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Fuel economy record

Press the INFO button, then select the Fuel Economy key, then select the Fuel Eco History key using the NISSAN controller.

The average fuel consumption history will be displayed in a graph form along with the average fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Maintenance items Press the INFO button and select the Mainte- nance key using the NISSAN controller; the maintenance information will be displayed on the screen.

Changing the maintenance interval

Select one of the maintenance reminder keys using the NISSAN controller to display the screen to change the maintenance interval. You can choose between Engine Oil, Oil Filter, Tire and Other Reminder.

Select the Interval key using the NISSAN control- ler. Touch the + or - keys or turn the NISSAN controller to choose the desired distance. To ac- cept the changes, press the BACK button.

Resetting the maintenance interval

To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi (km), select the Reset Distance key using the NISSAN controller.

LHA1233 LHA1234 LHA1235

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Displaying the maintenance notice re- minder

Select the Interval Reminder ON key to display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati- cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica- tor light will illuminate when it is ON.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au- tomatically displayed as shown when both of the following conditions are met:

The vehicle is driven the set distance and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The ignition switch is placed in the ON po- sition the next time the vehicle is driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN- TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press the BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays each time the key is turned ON until one of the following conditions are met:

The Reset key is selected.

The Interval Reminder ON key is set to OFF (indicator light not illuminated).

The maintenance interval is set again.

Where am I?

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual for information regarding this item.

Traffic Info

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual for information regarding this item.

Weather Info

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual for information regarding this item.

Map Update

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual for information regarding this item.

Navigation Version Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual for information regarding this item.

Other options For Voice Recognition settings, refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section.

For GPS Position, refer to the separate Naviga- tion System Owners Manual.

LHA0839

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HOW TO USE THE SETTING BUTTON When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set- tings screen will appear on the display. You can select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use the NISSAN controller to select each item to be set.

Display settings Select the Display key. On the screen above, select the Display Adjustment key. The Display Adjustment screen will appear.

This settings screen can also be accessed di- rectly by pressing the DISPLAY button on the control panel.

LHA1236 LHA1237 WHA1502

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Brightness/contrast:

Select the Brightness key or the Contrast key to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust the brightness to darker or brighter and the con- trast to lower or higher.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

Display off:

Select the Display ON key. The indicator of the Display ON turns off and the message above will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button on the control panel is operated, the display turns on for that operation. If one of the control panel buttons is pressed, the display will not automati- cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth- erwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on:

Press the SETTING button and select the Display key and then select the Display ON key, or

Press the OFF button and the mes- sage resuming display will appear and the Display ON key will be automatically turned on (no amber indicator).

Background color:

Select the Background Color key; the display color changes between day and night.

The new settings are automatically saved when you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK button or any other mode button.

LHA1239 LHA1242

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Color theme:

Select the Display key, then select the Color Theme key. The Color Theme select screen will appear.

Select the key for the desired color. The appear- ance of the background, arrows and bars will change for all screens accordingly. You can choose a black, blue or red color theme.

Clock The following display will appear after pressing the SETTING button, then selecting the Clock key using the NISSAN controller.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi- nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

Clock Format (24h):

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi- nated), the clock format will change from the default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.

Offset (hour):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the hours.

Offset (minute):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the minutes.

Daylight Savings Time:

When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi- nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the daylight savings time, touch the ON key; the amber indicator light will go out.

LHA1240 LHA1241

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Time Zone:

Select the Time Zone key; the Time Zone screen will appear.

Select one of the following zones, depending on the current location, by selecting the correct time zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light will illuminate for that location).

Pacific

Mountain

Central

Eastern

Atlantic

Newfoundland

Hawaii

Alaska

After selection/settings, press the BACK button or any other mode button to accept the changes.

Others settings Select the Others key using the NISSAN con- troller. Voice recognition, language and units set- ting screen will be displayed.

LHA1243 LHA1248

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Comfort settings

Select the Others key using the NISSAN con- troller, then select the Comfort key. The Com- fort settings screen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions by selecting the desired item using the NISSAN controller. The indicator light (box at the right of the selected item) alternately turns on and off each time the item is touched or the ENTER button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated ON

Indicator light is not illuminated OFF

Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or turn off the illumination of the interior lights when any door is unlocked.

Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower (left). After selecting the item, turn the NISSAN controller or touch the + or - key to change the setting.

Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration of the automatic headlight off timer. After select- ing the item, turn the NISSAN controller or touch the + or - key to change the setting. The available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 seconds.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati- cally according to the vehicle speed.

Selective Door Unlock: When this item is turned on, only the drivers door is unlocked first after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the drivers or front passengers side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within one minute.

When this item is turned to off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by pushing the door handle request switch.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: Select to turn on or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel moves to the previous position.

LHA1246 LHA1247

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn on or turn off the drivers seat moving backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the drivers door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the drivers seat moves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default: Select to change all the comfort and convenience systems to their default settings.

Language & Units:

Use the NISSAN controller to select the Lan- guage & Units key. Select which setting you want to change using the NISSAN controller and selecting either the Select Language key or the Select Units key.

Select Language:

Select the English key or the Franais key to change the language shown on the display.

If you select the Franais key, French language will be displayed, so please use the French Own- ers Manual. To obtain a French Owners Manual, please see Owners Manual/Service Manual Or- der Information in the Technical and consumer information section.

LHA1250 LHA1251

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Select Units:

Select the US (mi, F, MPG) key or the Metric (km, C, L/100 km) key to change the units shown on the display.

Voice Recognition:

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to NISSAN Voice Recognition system in this section.

Camera settings

Select the Camera key. The Camera settings screen will appear.

When this option is on (indicator light illumi- nated), predictive course lines will be displayed when the RearView monitor is displayed on the screen. See RearView Monitor in this section for more information.

Image viewer settings

For information about these settings, refer to Image viewer in this section.

Navigation settings Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- ers Manual for information regarding these set- tings.

Audio settings For audio settings, refer to Audio System in this section.

Phone settings For phone settings refer to Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section.

Bluetooth settings For Bluetooth phone settings, refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section.

For Bluetooth audio settings, refer to Bluetooth streaming audio in this section.

LHA1252 LHA1249

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Volume & beeps settings Navigation volume

For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa- rate Navigation System Owners Manual for infor- mation regarding these settings.

Phone volume

For phone volume settings refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys- tem in this section.

Switch beeps

With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a beep will sound if any control panel button is pressed.

OFF BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press the OFF button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the night display. The brightness can then be adjusted using the NISSAN controller.

If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the display will return to the previous display.

Press and hold the OFF button for more than two seconds to turn the display off. Press the button again to turn the display on.

LHA1253 LHA1254

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USING THE IMAGE VIEWER When a compatible portable storage device is plugged into the USB jack located in the center console, compatible image files stored on the device can be viewed on the control panel de- vice.

Connecting the portable storage device To connect a portable storage device to the sys- tem so that images stored on it can be viewed, insert the device into the USB jack located in the center console.

Viewing images

To view an image, press the SETTING button and then select the Image Viewer key with the NISSAN controller. The Image Viewer screen will be displayed.

A list of compatible images on the storage device is displayed on the left side of the screen, while the selected image is displayed on the right side of the screen. To choose a different picture from the list, use the NISSAN controller to scroll through the list once the desired image is high- lighted.

Select the Full Screen Display key and press the ENTER button to view a full screen version of the image.

Image requirements:

Image type: JPEG

File extensions: *.jpg, *.jpeg

Maximum resolution: 2048 x 1536

Maximum size: 2 MB

Colors: 32,768 (15-bit)

Maximum file name length: 253 bytes (dis- play only shows first 8 characters)

Maximum folders: 500

Maximum images per folder: 1024

LHA1309

IMAGE VIEWER (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Viewing images in a slideshow To view all of the images on the device in a slide- show, first enter the full screen mode while viewing one of the images. The slideshow control buttons are located on the right side of the screen.

Select the play key to begin the slideshow. The images shown on the screen will periodically change at a given interval of time. To skip through the images without waiting for them to change automatically, select the key to skip back- ward or the key to skip forward. Select the stop key to end the slideshow and return to the full screen display of the image currently on the screen.

Slideshow settings While in slideshow mode, select the Settings key. The Slideshow Settings screen will be dis- played. The following settings can be accessed:

Slideshow speed:

To change the interval of time at which images are changed during a slideshow, select the desired interval key. The indicator light to the right of the interval will come on to show that it is selected.

If the option No Auto Change is chosen, the slideshow will not change images automatically. The slideshow can then only be operated using the manual controls.

To return to the slideshow screen, select the Back key or press the BACK button on the control panel.

LHA1310 LHA1311 LHA1312

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Slideshow order:

Select the Random key to display the images in a random order during a slideshow. Select the Order List key to display the images in the order in which they are stored on the storage device.

Select the Back key or press the BACK button on the control panel to return to the slideshow screen.

When the shift selector is shifted into the R (Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a rearward view from the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

WARNING

The rear view camera is a convenience but it is not a substitute to check behind the vehicle when backing up.

The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.

Objects viewed in the RearView Moni- tor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.

Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.

Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation.

Do not put anything on the rear view camera. The rear view camera is in- stalled above the license plate.

When washing the vehicle with high- pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing wa- ter condensation on the lens, a mal- function, fire or an electric shock.

Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal- function or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

Objects in the rearview will appear visu- ally opposite than when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.

LHA1313

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line A are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

Red line 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

Yellow line 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)

Green line 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)

Green line 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 5 :

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines 6 :

Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift selector is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move de- pending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steer- ing wheel is in the neutral position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.

If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.

If the battery is disconnected or be- comes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incor- rectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ACC position, the predicted course lines may be dis- played incorrectly.

LHA1196

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a refer- ence only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual dis- tance between the vehicle and dis- played objects.

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are fur- ther than they appear. When backing up the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they ap- pear. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen A when the shift selector is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines B enter the parking space C .

LHA1197 LHA1198

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines D parallel to the parking space C while referring to the pre- dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift selector to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The distance guide line and the vehicle width guide line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis- tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the place A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place B . Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA2450

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the place A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on the hill is the place B . Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object The predicted course lines A do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

LHA2451 LHA1201

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Backing up behind a projecting object The position C is shown farther than the position B in the display. However, the position C is actually at the same distance as the position A . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the position A if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor, press the SETTING button with the RearView Monitor on and select the Display key. Select one of the items and change the value by touching the + or - key or by turning the NISSAN controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con- trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park- ing brake is firmly applied.

OPERATING TIPS

CAUTION

Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with di- luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.

Do not damage the camera as the moni- tor screen may be adversely affected.

When the shift selector is shifted to the R (Reverse) position, the display screen auto- matically changes to the RearView Monitor mode. However, the radio can be heard.

It may take some time until the RearView Monitor or the normal screen is displayed after the shift selector has been shifted to R (Reverse) from another position or to an- other position from R (Reverse). Objects may be distorted momentarily until the Rear- View Monitor screen is displayed com- pletely.

When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display ob- jects. This is not a malfunction.

When strong light directly enters the cam- era, objects may not be displayed clearly. This is not a malfunction.

Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

The screen may flicker under fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.

The colors of objects on the RearView Moni- tor may differ somewhat from those of the actual object.

LHA2452

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark place or at night. This is not a malfunc- tion.

If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera, the RearView Monitor may not clearly display objects. Clean the camera.

Do not use wax on the camera window. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp- ened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Adjust air flow direction for the drivers and pas- sengers side vents 1 , center vents 2 , and rear passengers vents 3 and 4 by moving the vent slide and/or vent assemblies.

For the drivers and passengers side vents1 , open or close by using the dial. Move the dial toward the position to open the vents or toward the position to close them.

LHA1030

VENTS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

1. Drivers temperature control dial/AUTO button

2. A/C ON/OFF button 3. Fan speed control (increase) 4. Front window defroster button 5. MODE button 6. Passengers temperature control dial/

DUAL button 7. System OFF 8. Fan speed control (decrease) 9. Rear window defroster button 10. Air recirculation button

WARNING

The air conditioner cooling function op- erates only when the engine is running.

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a con- stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Turn the drivers side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature. Driver and passenger tem- peratures can be set independently. Press DUAL to activate dual climate control func- tions. Turn the passengers side temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired passengers temperature.

Adjust the temperature dial to about 75F (24C) for normal operation.

LHA0859

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic)

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The temperature of the passenger compart- ment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off are also controlled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal- function.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the defroster control button to turn the system on. The display will show the defrost icon.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.

To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, press the fan control speed button until it reaches the maximum speed .

As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the auto mode.

When the defroster control button is activated, the air conditioner will automati- cally be turned on at outside temperatures above 36F (2C). If in defrost mode for more than one minute, the air conditioning system will continue to operate until the fan control is turned OFF, the vehicle is shut off, or the A/C button is pressed even if the air flow MODE control button is used to select a position other than the position. This dehumidifies the air which helps defog the windshield. The air recirculation mode auto- matically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control buttons

Press the fan speed control buttons + / to manually control the fan speed.

Press OFF to turn the system off.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger com- partment to prevent fogging in defrost, floor or def/floor modes.

Push the air recirculation button to recir- culate interior air inside the vehicle. Push the AUTO button to return to automatic mode.

Air flow control Pressing the MODE button manually controls air flow and selects the air outlet:

Air flows from center and side vents.

Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.

Air flows mainly from foot outlets. Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets. Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off Press the OFF button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

The sunload sensor 1 , located on the top center of the instrument panel, helps the system main- tain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.

Rear seat temperature and fan speed can be controlled from both the front seat overhead con- sole controls A or the rear seat overhead con- sole controls B .

Press the REAR CTRL button to transfer control of the rear climate functions to the rear passen- gers.

To operate the rear air conditioner, the engine must be running.

If the rear seat fan control dial is set to (0), the air conditioner is turned off. If it is set to any of the fan speed positions, air is discharged from the rear vents at the corresponding speed.

LIC0836 LHA0863

REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Rear fan speed control dial 2. Rear airflow mode buttons 3. Rear temperature control dial

CONTROLS

Fan control dial The fan control dial turns the rear vent fan on and off and controls fan speed.

Airflow mode buttons The airflow mode buttons select where the air flow is directed from.

Temperature control dial The temperature control dial allows rear passen- gers to adjust the temperature of the outlet air.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve- hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earths ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re- quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi- tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. See Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your environ- mentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re- frigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner ser- vice should be done only by an experi- enced technician with proper equipment.

LHA0861 WHA1129

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

RADIO

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the VOL (volume)/ONOFF (power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition switch should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- dio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- ity of that reception.

However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These char- acteristics are completely normal in a given re- ception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be- cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other ve- hicles can work against ideal reception. De- scribed below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the de- vice in a different location may reduce or elimi- nate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi (40 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter- nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line- of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char- acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo- mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also sub- ject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so equipped) When the satellite radio is used for the first time or the battery has been replaced, the satellite radio may not work properly. This is not a mal- function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or large building for satellite radio to receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail- able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can affect satellite radio performance. Remove the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

XM is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Sat- ellite Radio, Inc.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player (models without Navigation System)

CAUTION

Do not force a compact disc into the CD insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or CD changer/player.

Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

Only one CD can be loaded into the CD player at a time.

Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO logo on the disc or packaging.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

LHA0099

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

The CD player sometimes cannot func- tion when the compartment tempera- ture is extremely high or low. Decrease/increase the temperature before use.

Do not expose the CD to direct sun- light.

CDs that are in poor condition or are dirty, scratched or covered with finger- prints may not work properly.

The following CDs may not work prop- erly:

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Do not use the following CDs as they may cause the CD player to malfunc- tion:

3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

CDs that are not round

CDs with a paper label

CDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

This audio system can only play pre- recorded CDs. It has no capability to record or burn CDs.

If the CD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

Confirm that the CD is inserted cor- rectly (the label side is facing up, etc.).

Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem- perature inside the player. Remove the CD by pressing the EJECT button. After a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys- tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) CD).

CD/DVD combination player (models with Navigation System)

Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD insert slot. This could damage the CD/DVD player.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to the hu- midity. If this occurs, remove the CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.

The player may skip while driving on rough roads.

The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot function when the passenger compart- ment temperature is extremely high. Decrease the temperature before use.

Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round discs that have the COMPACT disc DIGITAL AUDIO or DVD Video logo on the disc or packaging.

Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched, covered with finger- prints, or that have pinholes may not work properly.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The following CDs/DVDs are not guar- anteed to play:

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Recordable compact discs (DVDR, DVDR DL)

Rewritable compact discs (DVDRW, DVDRW DL)

Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as they may cause the CD/DVD player to malfunction.

3.1 in (8 cm) discs

CDs/DVDs that are not round

CDs/DVDs with a paper label

CDs/DVDs that are warped, scratched, or have abnormal edges

This audio system can only play pre- recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa- bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.

If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of the following messages will be displayed.

Disc Read Error:

Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.).

Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

This error may be due to the tempera- ture inside the player getting too high. Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the EJECT button, and after a short time reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can be played when the temperature of the player returns to normal. If the error persists, consult your local dealership.

Unplayable File:

The file may be copy protected.

The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or DIVX type.

Region Invalid

The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions.

Use DVDs with a region code 1, ALL or 1 included for your DVD entertainment system. (The region code A is displayed as a small sym- bol printed on the top of the DVD B .) This vehicle-installed DVD player cannot play DVDs with a re- gion code other than 1 or ALL.

Copyright and trademark

The technology protected by the U.S. patent and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other right holders is adopted for this system.

LHA0484

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

This copyright protected technology cannot be used without a permit from Macrovision Corporation. It is limited to personal use, etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision Corporation is not issued.

Modifying or disassembling is prohib- ited.

Dolby digital is manufactured under li- cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

Dolby and the double D mark are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory (if so equipped)

WARNING

Do not connect or disconnect the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an acci- dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the USB device and the port. Make sure that the USB device is con- nected correctly into the USB port.

Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.

Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may break the wire, USB device or the port.

To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the fol- lowing precautions.

Do not bend the cable excessively (1.6 in [40 mm]) radius minimum.

Do not twist the cable excessively (more than 180 degrees).

Do not pull or drop the cable.

Do not hit or press the USB port or USB device with hands, feet, or objects.

Do not store objects with sharp edges in the storage area where the cable is stored.

Do not leave the USB device and attached devices in the vehicle com- partment. When not in use for ex- tended periods of time, store the cable and USB device in a clean, dust free environment at room tempera- ture and without direct sun exposure.

Do not use the cable for any other purposes than its intended use in the vehicle.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.

In some states/area, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Partitioned USB devices may play correctly.

Some characters used in other lan- guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Us- ing English language characters with a USB device is recommended.

General notes for USB use:

The USB device may not function when the passenger compartment tempera- ture is extremely high. Lower the tem- perature before use.

During cold weather or rainy days, the player may malfunction due to humid- ity. If this occurs, remove the USB de- vice and dehumidify or ventilate the USB player completely.

Do not connect a USB device if a con- nector, cable or USB port is wet. Allow the connector, cable, and USB port to dry completely before connecting the USB device. (Wait for 24 hours or more until it is dry.) If the connector and USB port are exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short circuit between the connector pins and USB port. In this case, replace the cable and USB port. Otherwise damage to the USB device and a loss of function may occur.

If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. Re- place the cable with a new one.

Do not put a USB device in a location where static electricity occurs, electri- cal noise is generated or hot air from the air conditioner blows directly on it. Doing so may cause the data stored on the USB device to be corrupted.

Notes for iPod use:

iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod is connected properly.

An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod.

An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.

An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod nano (2nd Generation).

Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod.

Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.

If an iPod automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momen- tarily black out, but will soon recover.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Bluetooth streaming audio (if so equipped)

Some Bluetooth audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

It is necessary to set up the wireless con- nection between a compatible Bluetooth audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth module before using the Bluetooth audio.

Operating procedure of the Bluetooth au- dio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device be- fore using it with this system.

The Bluetooth audio may be stopped under the following conditions:

Receiving a call on the Hands-Free Phone System.

Checking the connection to the hands- free phone.

Do not place the Bluetooth audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless con- nection disruption.

While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat- tery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.

This system supports the Bluetooth Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

CD or USB with Compressed Audio Files (models without Navigation System)

The file types supported by this system are MP3 and WMA.

Explanation of terms:

MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near CD quality sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesnt hear.

WMA Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Micro- soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.

Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.

ID3/WMA Tag The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor- mation is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

* Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other coun- tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA files is as illustrated.

The names of folders not containing MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the display.

If there is a file in the top level of the disc, Root Folder is displayed.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Playback order chart WHA1078

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB 2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista operating system-based computer) are not supported. UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0 VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported. USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported versions

MP3 Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*2

WMA*1 Version WMA7, WMA8 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*2

Tag information (Song title and artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only) WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Text character number limitation 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 LE), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 BE), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8)

*1 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*2 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/USB device was inserted correctly. Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than .MP3 or .WMA cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ- ing application or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the CD/USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty. It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the next song when playing

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

CD, DVD or USB with Compressed Audio Files (models with Navigation System)

The file types supported by this system are MP3, WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.

Explanation of terms:

MP3 MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near CD quality sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track can reduce the file size by ap- proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep- tible loss in quality. The compression re- duces certain parts of sound that seem in- audible to most people.

WMA Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a compressed audio format created by Micro- soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.

AAC/M4A Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a lossy audio compression format. Audio files that have been encoded with AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver a higher quality of sound than MP3.

ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus Adaptive Trans- form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy audio compression format developed by Sony.

Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

Sampling frequency Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.

Multisession Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.

ID3/WMA Tag The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, album title, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows, Windows Media and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of America and/or other countries.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Playback order:

Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB device with compressed audio files is as illus- trated.

The folder names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown in the display.

If there is a file in the top level of the disc/USB, Root Folder is displayed.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

Playback order chart WHA1374

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDR DL, USB 2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDR DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista operating system-based computer) are not supported. UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0 * VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported. USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported versions*1

MP3 Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

ATRAC Version ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus

Tag information (Song title and artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only) WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder) Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played. *2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played. *3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed. *4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly. Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty. Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player. If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature. If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played. Files with extensions other than .MP3, .WMA, .AAC, .M4A or .AA3 cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac- ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications. Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ- ing application or other text editing applications. Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc. Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty. It takes a relatively long time before the music starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to the next song when playing

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order. Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Compressed Video Files (models with Navigation System) Explanation of terms:

DivX DivX refers to the DivX codec owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres- sion of video based on MPEG-4.

AVI AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave. It is standard file format originated by Micro- soft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can be saved into the .avi file format for playback on this system if it meets the requirements stated in the table in this section. However, all .avi files are not playable on this system since different encodings can be used other than the DivX codec.

ASF ASF stands for Advanced Systems Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet the requirements stated in the table in this section can be played.

Bit rate Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital video files. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:

Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDRW DL, USB 2.0 Memory

File Systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVDR, DVDRW, DVDRW DL

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0 * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported. * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported. * VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB Memory FAT16, FAT32

File Types

.divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6 Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM

.asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4 Audio Codec G.726

Bit Rates .divx, .avi Maximum Average 4 Mbps

Maximum Peak 8 Mbps

Resolution

.divx, .avi Minimum 32 x 32 Maximum 720 x 480

.asf Minimum 32 x 32 Maximum 720 x 576

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

1. SEEK/CAT button 2. TRACK button 3. FM button 4. AM button 5. DISC button 6. SCAN button

7. RPT button 8. RDM button 9. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob

(Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance) 10. AUX button 11. XM button*

12. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 13. CD eject button 14. VOL/ONOFF control knob 15. FLDR button 16. TUNE button

LHA2444

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

*No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to ac- cess satellite radio stations unless op- tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see Audio opera- tion precautions in this section.

Audio main operation

VOL/ONOFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL/ONOFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ONOFF control knob.

Turn the VOL/ONOFF control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv- ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal- ance and Fade):

Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows:

Bass Treble Balance Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re- peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. If the control knob is not pressed for approxi- mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press the SETTING button. Then select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller; the audio settings screen will be displayed. Select the key or + key to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the BACK button.

LHA1304

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

For information on how to use the NISSAN con- troller, see How to use the NISSAN controller in this section.

Clock operation

For additional information on setting the clock, see Adjusting the time in this section.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text might be able to be displayed (when CD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the following text might be able to be displayed by selecting the Text key:

Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed.

File displays the name of the file currently playing.

Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name.

Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name.

Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artists name.

Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur- rently playing.

Track displays the name of the song on the CD currently playing.

Some of this text or modes might not display while playing a regular CD. Select the Menukey with the NISSAN controller, then select the Text key to display the text for the CD.

LHA1314 WHA0949 WHA0950

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation FM/AM band select:

Press the AM button to change to the AM band.

Press the FM button to change the band as follows:

FM1 FM2

When the FM or AM button is pressed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ONOFF control knob is pressed ON.

If a compact disc is playing when the FMAM button is pressed, the compact disc will auto- matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

XM band select:

Press the XM button to change the band as follows:

XM1* XM2* XM3* XM1*

When the XM button is pressed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ONOFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will not be available unless an op- tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscrip- tion is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

Manual tuning:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR knob to the right or left or use the TUNE and FLDR buttons.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button or the TRACK button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad- casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the SCAN button again during this five second pe- riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen stations can be set for the XM band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the AM or FM buttons or choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the XM button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

Station call sign, such as WHFR 98.3.

Station name, such as The Groove.

Music or programming type such as Clas- sical, Country, or Rock.

When the Text key is selected with the NISSAN controller on the display while the radio is playing, additional information is displayed on the screen.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the RDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati- cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com- pact disc was playing, pressing the VOL/ONOFF control knob will start the compact disc.

DISC button:

When the DISC button is pressed with the sys- tem off and a compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pressed with a com- pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Press several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Press several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will ad- vance the number of times the button is pressed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- lect tracks when a CD is playing.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Rewind and Fast

Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or the TRACK (fast forward) button while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TUNE/FLDR knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders. This can also be performed using the TUNE and FLDR buttons.

RPT button:

Press the RPT button to change the play pattern as follows:

CD:

Repeat All 1 Track Repeat

CD with compressed audio files:

Repeat All 1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat Repeat All

Repeat All: Normal play mode. All tracks will constantly play in sequential order. 1 Folder Repeat: The folder that is currently being accessed will be repeated. 1 Track Repeat: The track that is currently playing will be repeated.

RDM button:

Press the RDM button to change the play pattern as follows:

CD:

Repeat All 1 Disc Random

CD with compressed audio files:

Repeat All 1 Disc Random 1 Folder Ran- dom Repeat All

Repeat All: Normal play mode. All tracks will constantly play in sequential order. 1 Disc Random: The tracks on the disc that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order. 1 Folder Random: The tracks in the folder that is currently playing will be played in a mixed order.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the com- pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.

When the button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.

AUX (auxiliary) input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the center console 1 . NTSC compatible devices such as video games, camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3 players, can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks.

The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden- tification purposes:

Red right channel audio input

White left channel audio input

Yellow video input

LHA2460

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the aux- iliary input jacks, press the AUX button until the AUX mode appears in the display. The output from the device will be played through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P) Park position and the parking brake engaged) and audio system.

AUX settings

Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con- troller and press the ENTER button.

Choose one of the display modes by selecting

the key or the key:

Normal

Wide

Cinema

Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system, see iPod player op- eration without Navigation System in this sec- tion.

For more information about the USB interface available with this system, see USB interface (models without Navigation System) in this sec- tion.

LHA1367

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. SEEK/CAT button 2. TRACK button 3. AM/FM button 4. XM button* 5. SCAN button 6. RPT button

7. RDM button 8. TUNE/FLDR and AUDIO control knob

(Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance) 9. DISC/AUX button 10. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 11. CD eject button

12. VOL/ONOFF control knob 13. FLDR button 14. TUNE button

LHA2445

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

*No satellite radio reception is available when the XM button is pressed to ac- cess satellite radio stations unless op- tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD PLAYER (if so equipped)

For all operation precautions, see Audio opera- tion precautions in this section.

Audio main operation

VOL/ONOFF control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and push the VOL/ONOFF control knob while the system is off to call up the mode that was playing immediately before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ONOFF control knob.

Turn the VOL/ONOFF control knob to adjust the volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv- ing speed changes.

AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal- ance and Fade):

Press the AUDIO control knob to change the mode as follows:

Bass Treble Balance Fade

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the sound between the right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re- peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. If the control knob is not pressed for approxi- mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):

To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press the SETTING button. Then select the Audio key using the NISSAN controller, then press the EN- TER button; the audio settings screen will be displayed. Select the key or +key to change the SSV.

While in this screen you can also adjust the other audio settings by selecting the corresponding key.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the desired level, press the BACK button.

LHA1236

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

For information on how to use the NISSAN con- troller, see How to use the NISSAN controller in this section.

Display album cover art:

When an audio source encoded with album cover art is played, the album cover art can be displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on or off, touch the Display Album Cover Art key. When the feature is activated, the amber indica- tor next to the word ON will illuminate.

CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio files

While listening to a CD or compressed audio files, certain text might be able to be displayed (when CD encoded with text is being used).

Depending on how the CD or compressed audio files are encoded, the following text might be displayed:

Folder displays the name of the current folder being accessed.

File displays the name of the file currently playing.

LHA1256 LHA1257 LHA1258

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the song name.

Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the album name.

Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the artists name.

Some of this text might not display while playing a regular CD.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

AM/FM band select:

Press the AM/FM button to change the band as follows:

AM FM1 FM2 AM

When the FMAM button is pressed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ONOFF control knob is pressed ON.

If a compact disc is playing when the AM/FM button is pressed, the compact disc will auto- matically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate during FM stereo reception. When the stereo

broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati- cally change from stereo to monaural reception.

XM band select:

Press the XM button to change the band as follows:

XM1* XM2* XM3* XM1*

When the XM button is pressed with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the radio will come on at the station last played.

The last station played will also come on when the VOL/ONOFF control knob is pressed ON.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite radio mode will not be available unless an op- tional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscrip- tion is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station played will come on.

Manual tuning:

To manually tune the radio, turn the TUNE/FLDR knob to the right or left or use the TUNE and FLDR buttons.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

tuning buttons:

For AM or FM: Press the SEEK/CAT button or the TRACK button to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.

For XM: Press the SEEK/CAT button or the TRACK button to go to the first channel of the previous or next category.

SCAN tuning:

Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad- casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the SCAN button again during this five second pe- riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations:

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the SAT radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 if so equipped).

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 using the FMAM select button, or choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using the SAT button.

2. Tune to the desired station using manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 6) until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come on and the sound will resume. Programming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that case, reset the desired stations.

List (AM and FM)

Select the List key using the NISSAN controller or touchscreen to see a list of the presets in the AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.

Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio, if so equipped)

Select the Menukey using the NISSAN control- ler or touchscreen to see a list of options:

Preset List Displays the list of presets. Press and hold the touchscreen or ENTER button on the NISSAN controller to save a preset.

Customize Channel List deselect chan- nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER knob.

Favorite Artist & Songs

Tags the current artist or song playing on XM as a favorite.

Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a favorite artist or song is playing on XM. The audio system must be playing XM radio for this feature to work.

Delete a favorite artist or song.

Categories Displays a category list for XM radio. Select a category to select the first channel for that category.

Direct Tune Tune to a channel by entering the channel number.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data information service transmitted by some radio stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur- rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations are now considering broadcasting RDS data.

RDS can display:

Station call sign, such as WHFR 98.3.

Station name, such as The Groove.

Music or programming type such as Clas- sical, Country, or Rock.

Station specific text.

LHA1375

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the text information is automatically displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and insert the compact disc into the slot with the label side facing up. The compact disc will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati- cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com- pact disc was playing, pressing the VOL/ONOFF control knob will start the compact disc.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the system off and the compact disc loaded, the system will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio will automatically be turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the track being played returns to its beginning. Press several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the button is pressed.

When the TRACK button is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the next track will start to play from its beginning. Press several times to skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the number of times the button is pressed. (When the last track on the compact disc is skipped through, the first track will be played.)

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- lect tracks when a CD is being played.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Rewind and Fast

Forward) buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or the TRACK (fast forward) button while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc will return to normal play speed.

TUNE/FLDR knob

While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the TUNE/FLDR knob right or left to scan forward or backward through available folders. This can also be performed using the TUNE and FLDR buttons.

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD menu

Touch the Menu key on the display while a CD or CD with compressed audio files is playing to bring up a list of options. Depending on the type of CD being played, the following options may be available:

Play Mode

This option allows you to alter the play pattern of the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to apply. The modes change the play pattern as follows:

1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.

1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are played randomly.

1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD only) - the current folder is repeated.

1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD only) - tracks from the current folder are played randomly.

Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential order until stopped.

LHA1258 LHA1259 LHA1262

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Folder List

The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from that folder.

Track List

The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the key of a track name to begin playing that track.

CD EJECT button:

When the button is pressed with the com- pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be ejected.

When the button is pressed while the compact disc is being played, the compact disc will eject and the system will turn off.

AUX (auxiliary) input jacks

The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the center console 1 . NTSC compatible devices such as video games, camcorders and portable video players can be connected to the auxiliary input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3 players, can also be connected to the system through the auxiliary input jacks.

The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden- tification purposes:

Red right channel audio input

White left channel audio input

Yellow video input

LHA1260 LHA1261 LHA2460

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the aux- iliary input jacks, press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the display. The output from the device will be played through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P) Park position and the parking brake engaged) and audio system.

AUX settings

Select the Settings key using the NISSAN con- troller.

The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low, Medium or High.

Additional features For more information about the iPod player available with this system, see iPod player op- eration with Navigation System in this section.

For more information about the USB interface available with this system, see USB interface (models with Navigation System) in this section.

For more information about the Bluetooth streaming audio feature available with this sys- tem, see Bluetooth streaming audio in this section.

WHA1393 LHA1394

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD) PLAYER OPERATION (models with Navigation System)

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain- ment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front display while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie is played. To view movies on the front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift selector to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the DVD system or wear the head- phones while the vehicle is in motion so that full attention may be given to ve- hicle operation.

Do not attempt to modify the system to display a movie on the front screen while the vehicle is being driven. Doing so may distract the driver and may cause a collision and serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Only operate the DVD while the vehicle engine is running. Operating the DVD for extended periods of time with the engine OFF can discharge the vehicle battery.

Do not allow the system to get wet. Excessive moisture such as spilled liq- uids may cause the system to malfunction.

While playing VIDEO-CD media, this DVD player does not guarantee com- plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD formats.

Playing a DVD

DISC-AUX button

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while watching the images.

Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode is active on the display.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto- matically.

The operation screen will be turned on when the DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-

LHA1376

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

matically after a period of time. To turn it on again, press the DISC-AUX button.

DVD operation keys

When the DVD is playing without the operation screen being shown, you may use the touch- screen to select items from the displayed video. You may also use the NISSAN controller to select an item from the displayed video. When the op- eration screen is being shown, use the NISSAN controller or the touchscreen to select an item from the displayed menus.

PAUSE:

Select the key to pause the DVD. To re- sume playing the DVD, use the key.

PLAY:

Select the key to start playing the DVD or resume playing the DVD after it has been paused.

STOP:

Select the key to stop playing the DVD.

NEXT/PREVIOUS CHAPTER:

Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward. Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters will advance forward or backward the number of times the respective key is touched or selected with the NISSAN controller.

CM SKIP:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-

VR. Select the or key to fast forward or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM settings. For more information, see DVD set- tings in this section.

Top Menu:

When the Top Menu key is selected while the DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each disc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc- tions attached to the disc.

DVD settings Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings:

Key (DVD-VIDEO) Displays the operation keys for the specific DVD menu.

Select the directional keys to move the cursor on the DVD menu.

Select the Enter key to fix the selected menu item.

Select the Move key to move the loca- tion of the operation keys on the screen.

Select the Back key to return to the previous menu screen.

Select the Hide key to hide the opera- tion keys.

Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO) Some menus specific to each disc will be shown. For details, see the instructions at- tached to the disc.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) The scene with the specified title will be displayed the number of times the + or - side is selected.

Group Search (VIDEO CD) The scene with the specified group will be displayed the number of times the + or - side is selected.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD, CD-DA, DVD-VR) Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen. Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key. The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Select No. (VIDEO CD) Select the Select No. key to open the number entry screen. Input the number you want to search for and select the OK key. The specified scene will be played.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO) If the DVD contains different angles (such as moving images), the current image angle can be switched to another one. Select the Angle key and use the + or - key to change the angle.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO) When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene can be seen from a different angle.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO) DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when the Menu Skip key is turned on. Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO) Select the CM Skip key to choose the setting time for CM backward and forward operations. Use the + or - key to choose a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto- matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD) Select the DVD Language key to open the number entry screen. Input the number cor- responding to the preferred language and select the OK key. The DVD top menu language will be changed to the one speci- fied.

Display Adjust the image quality of the screen by selecting the preferred adjustment items.

Audio Choose the preferred language for the au- dio.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR) Choose the preferred language for the sub- titles.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD, DVD-VR) Choose from the Full, Wide, Normal or Cinema mode.

Title List (DVD-VR) Choose the preferred title from the list.

Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode.

PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR) Choose from the PG or PL mode.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB INTERFACE (models without Navigation System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB input jack

CAUTION

Depending on size and shape of USB device, the console lid may not fully close. Do not force console lid closed as this may damage USB device.

Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the USB device and the port. Make sure that the USB device is con- nected correctly into the USB port. (Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be- fore inserting the device.)

Do not locate objects near the USB de- vice to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB device and the port. Pres- sure from the objects may damage the USB device and the port.

The USB input jack is located in the center con- sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 1 .

When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor- age device can be played through the vehicles audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the AUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL control knob to restart the USB memory.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or TRACK (fast forward) button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an in- creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio file re- turns to normal play speed.

LHA2455

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au- dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the TRACK button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. Press the TRACK button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory, turn the TUNE/FLDR knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen.

This can also be performed using the TUNE and FLDR buttons.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

All Random 1 Folder Random OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re- peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re- peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi- cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

LHA2455

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB INTERFACE (models with Navigation System)

Connecting a device to the USB input jack

CAUTION

Depending on size and shape of USB device, the console lid may not fully close. Do not force console lid closed as this may damage USB device.

Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the USB device and the port. Make sure that the USB device is con- nected correctly into the USB port. (Some USB devices come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be- fore inserting the device.)

Do not locate objects near the USB de- vice to prevent the objects from leaning on the USB device and the port. Pres- sure from the objects may damage the USB device and the port.

The USB input jack is located in the center con- sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 1 .

When a compatible storage device is plugged into the jack, compatible audio and video files on the storage device can be played through the vehicles audio system and center display screen.

When there are both audio and movie files in the USB memory, the mode select screen is dis- played. Use the touchscreen or the NISSAN con- troller to select the preferred type of file. When there is only type of file in the USB memory, that audio or movie operation screen is displayed and starts to play.

When you play a file with limited playing time, the confirmation screen will be displayed before starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time and select yes to start playing.

Audio file operation

DISC/AUX button:

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position and press the DISC/AUX button to switch to the USB input mode. If another audio source is playing and a USB memory device is inserted, press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly until the center dis- play changes to the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL control knob to restart the USB memory.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

buttons:

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) button or TRACK (fast forward) button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast forward the track being played. The track plays at an in- creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio file re- turns to normal play speed.

LHA1378

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons:

Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au- dio file on the USB device is playing to return to the beginning of the current track. Press the SEEK/CAT button several times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the TRACK button while an audio file on the USB device is playing to advance one track. Press the TRACK button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory, turn the TUNE/FLDR knob or choose a folder displayed on the screen.

This can also be performed using the TUNE and FLDR buttons.

RDM button:

When the RDM button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

All Random 1 Folder Random OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will be played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RPT button:

When the RPT button is pressed while an audio file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat 1 Track Repeat OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be re- peated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be re- peated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi- cator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is displayed on the screen unless no pattern is applied.

Menu:

There are some options available during play- back. Select one of the following that are dis- played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the following information for each item.

Movie Playback Switch to the movie playback mode. This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains movie files. The shift selector must be in Park (P) with the parking brake engaged to watch movies from a USB device.

LHA1294

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Folder List/Track List Displays the folder or track list. The Movie Playback key is also displayed in this list screen and enables you to switch to the movie playback mode.

Play Mode Choose the preferred play mode using the NISSAN controller or the touchscreen.

Movie file operation

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front seat occupants to operate the USB memory while watching the images.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pushed with the system off and the USB memory inserted, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the USB memory is inserted, press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the USB memory mode.

Operation keys:

To operate the USB memory, select the desired key displayed on the display screen.

Pause:

Select the key to pause the movie file. To resume playing the movie file, use the key.

Play:

Select the key to start playing the movie file or resume the movie file if it has been paused.

Stop:

Select the key to stop playing the movie file.

Next Chapter/Fast Forward:

Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward. The chapters will ad- vance the number of times the key is se- lected. Press and hold the key to fast for- ward the chapter.

LHA1379

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Previous Chapter/Rewind:

Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters will go back the number of times the key is selected. Press and hold the key to rewind the chap- ter.

List:

Select the List key on the movie file operation screen to display the file list.

Settings:

Select the Settings key to adjust the following settings:

Audio File Playback Switch to the audio playback mode. This item is displayed only when the USB memory contains audio files.

Play Mode Choose between the Normal or 1 Track Repeat play modes.

10 Key Search Select the 10 Key Search key to open the number entry screen. Input the number you want to search for and the specified file or folder will be played.

Display Adjust the image quality of the screen.

DRC DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto- matically adjusts the soundtrack volume level to maintain a more even sound to the speakers.

Audio Choose the preferred language of the audio.

Subtitle Choose the preferred language of the sub- titles.

Display Mode Choose between the Normal, Wide, Cinema or Full display modes.

LHA1380

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod* PLAYER OPERATION WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod

CAUTION

Depending on size and shape of the iPod and iPod cable, the console lid may not fully close. Do not force con- sole lid closed as this may damage the iPod and iPod cable.

Do not force the iPod cable into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the iPod cable and the port. Make sure that the iPod cable is con- nected correctly into the USB port. (Some iPod cables come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be- fore inserting the iPod cable.)

Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to prevent the objects from lean- ing on the iPod cable and the port. Pressure from the objects may damage the iPod cable and the port.

To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB jack located in the center console. Connect the iPod-specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle 1 . If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod.

* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility The following models are compatible:

iPod 5th Generation - version 1.2.1

iPod Classic - version 1.1

iPod Touch - version 2.1.0

iPod Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1

iPod Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3

iPod Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2

Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

LHA2455

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing, pressing the VOL/ONOFF control knob will start the iPod.

AUX button:

When the AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected, press the AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode.

Interface:

The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod in- terface. Use the NISSAN controller and the BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. For further information about each item, see the iPod Owners Manual.

Playlists

Podcasts

Songs

Albums

Artists

Genres

Composers

Audiobooks

The following keys shown on the screen are also available:

MENU: returns to the previous screen.

: plays/pauses the music selected.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button or TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec- onds while the iPod is playing, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played.

When the SEEK/CAT button or TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec- onds while the iPod is playing, the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the iPod will return to the normal play speed.

LHA1395 LHA1396

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod* PLAYER OPERATION WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Connecting iPod

CAUTION

Depending on size and shape of the iPod and iPod cable, the console lid may not fully close. Do not force con- sole lid closed as this may damage the iPod and iPod cable.

Do not force the iPod cable into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the iPod cable and the port. Make sure that the iPod cable is con- nected correctly into the USB port. (Some iPod cables come with a mark as a guide. Make sure that the mark is facing the correct direction be- fore inserting the iPod cable.)

Do not locate objects near the iPod cable to prevent the objects from lean- ing on the iPod cable and the port. Pressure from the objects may damage the iPod cable and the port.

To connect an iPod to the vehicle so that the iPod can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB jack located in the center console. Connect the iPod-specific end of the cable to the iPod and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle 1 . If your iPod supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod.

* iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility The following models are compatible:

iPod 5th Generation (firmware version 1.2.3 or later)

iPod Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 or later)

iPod Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 or later)*

iPod Nano - 1st generation (firmware ver- sion 1.3.1 or later)

iPod Nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver- sion 1.1.3 or later)

iPod Nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver- sion 1.1.3 or later)

iPod Nano - 4th generation (firmware ver- sion 1.0.4 or later)

LHA2455

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

iPod Nano - 5th generation (firmware ver- sion 1.0.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod may not be fully functional.

Make sure that your iPod firmware is updated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly to switch to the iPod mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod was playing, pressing the VOL/ONOFF control knob will start the iPod.

DISC/AUX button:

When the DISC/AUX button is pressed with the system off and the iPod connected, the system will turn on. If another audio source is playing and the iPod is connected, press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to the iPod mode.

LHA1397

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Interface:

The interface for iPod operation shown on the vehicle center display is similar to the iPod in- terface. Use the NISSAN controller and the BACK button to play the iPod with your favorite settings. The touchscreen can also be used to control your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the menu list screen. For further information about each item, see the iPod Owners Manual.

Now Playing

Playlists

Artists

Albums

Songs

Podcasts

Genres

Composers

Audiobooks

Shuffle Songs

The following keys shown on the screen are also available:

MENU: returns to the previous screen.

: plays/pauses the music selected. Play mode:

While the iPod is playing, touch the Menu key to display the iPod menu. Touch the Play Mode key to display the Play Mode screen and adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio- books. For further information about each item, see the iPod Owners Manual.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:

When the SEEK/CAT button or TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec- onds while the iPod is playing, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod will be played.

LHA1398 LHA1315

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

When the SEEK/CAT button or TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec- onds while the iPod is playing, the iPod will play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is released, the iPod will return to the normal play speed.

The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- lect tracks when the iPod is playing.

Scrolling menus:

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll the list by the first letter. To activate letter index- ing, perform one of the following:

Turn the NISSAN controller quickly.

Press and hold the up/down directional ar- rows on the NISSAN controller.

Touch and hold the page up/down arrows on the touchscreen.

To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of the following:

Press the ENTER button on the NISSAN controller.

Push the ENTER switch on the steering wheel.

Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.

BLUETOOTH STREAMING AUDIO (if so equipped) If you have a compatible Bluetooth audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicles audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicles speakers.

LHA1399

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Connecting Bluetooth audio To connect your Bluetooth audio device to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru- ment panel.

2. Select the Bluetooth key.

3. Select the Connect Bluetooth key.

4. A screen will appear asking if you are con- necting the device to use with the hands- free phone system. Select the No key.

5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed by your Bluetooth audio device to com- plete the connection process. See the Bluetooth audio devices owners manual for more information.

LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1351

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Audio main operation To switch to the Bluetooth audio mode, press the DISC/AUX button repeatedly until the Bluetooth audio mode is displayed on the screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth audio are dis- played on the screen.

Bluetooth audio settings To adjust the Bluetooth audio settings, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru- ment panel.

2. Select the Bluetooth key.

3. Select the Connected Devices key.

4. Select the Audio Player key. SAA2510 LHA1316 LHA1296

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. A list of the connected Bluetooth audio players is displayed. Select the name of the device you wish to edit.

6. The Device Name and Device Address are displayed on the screen. Select the Select key to make this device the active Bluetooth audio player. Select the Edit key to edit the details of the player, such as Device Name. Select the Delete key to delete the device.

CD CARE AND CLEANING Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

Always place the discs in the storage case when they are not being used.

To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the center to the outer edge using a clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. Remove the rough edges by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA1297 LHA1298 LHA0049

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

1. SOURCE select switch 2. Tuning switch 3. Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

If you have the Type A switch, with the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push the POWER switch to turn the audio system on or off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition switch placed in the ACC or ON position, push the MODE switch to turn the audio system on.

SOURCE select switch Push the source select switch to change the mode in the following sequence:

Models without Navigation System: AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) USB/iPod* (if so equipped) CD/DVD* AUX* AM.

Models with Navigation System: AM FM1 FM2 XM1 XM2 XM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped) CD/DVD* USB/iPod* Bluetooth Audio* AUX* AM.

* These modes are only available when compat- ible media storage is inserted into the device.

Volume control switch Push the volume control switch up or down to increase or decrease the volume.

Menu control switch/ENTER button

While the display is showing a MAP, STATUS or Audio screen, tilt the Menu Control switch up- ward or downward to select a station, track, CD or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds pro- vides a different function than a tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station.

Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station.

Press the ENTER button to show the list of preset stations.

XM (if so equipped):

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station.

Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to go to the next or previous category.

Press the ENTER button to show the XM Menu.

LHA2054

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod (if so equipped):

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.

Press the ENTER button to show the iPod Menu.

CD:

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.

Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number (if playing compressed audio files).

Press the ENTER button to show the CD Menu.

DVD (if so equipped):

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.

Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the title number.

Press the ENTER button to select an item from the DVD display.

When the transparent operation menu ap- pears, the switch will control the menu.

USB (if so equipped):

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.

Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the folder number.

Press the ENTER button to show the USB Menu.

Bluetooth Audio (if so equipped):

Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.

AUX:

Press the ENTER button to show the AUX Menu.

ANTENNA Window antenna The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear passenger and driver side windows.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film near the rear driver or passenger side window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.

When cleaning the inside of the rear driver or passenger side window, be careful not to scratch or damage the window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full atten- tion may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.

If you must make a call while your ve- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- lar phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Ex- ercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

Keep the antenna as far away as pos- sible from the electronic control modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic con- trol system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage con- trol system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. Refer to Vari- able voltage control system in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself sec- tion later in this manual.

Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

WARNING

Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in- vehicle phone module, no other phone connect- ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto- matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the paired cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes.

Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- mended phone list and pairing.

You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- vice area.

Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a moun- tainous area.

LHA2461

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other persons voice dur- ing a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat- tery power of the cellular phone may dis- charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.

If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see Troubleshooting guide in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- shooting help.

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Stor- ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Refer to the cellular phone Owners Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- tions.

Operation is subject to the following two con- ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde- sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

Operation is subject to the following two con- ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all re- quirements of the Canadian Interference- Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. If the button is pressed before the initialization completes, the system will announce Hands-free phone system not ready and will not react to voice commands.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.

Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.

Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds.

Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press and release the button located on the steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro- phone, and voice feedback is given when the command is accepted.

If you need to hear the available commands for the current menu again, say Help and the system will repeat them.

If a command is not recognized, the system announces, Command not recognized. Please try again. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

If you want to go back to the previous com- mand, you can say Go back or Correc- tion any time the system is waiting for a response.

You can cancel a command when the sys- tem is waiting for a response by saying, Cancel or Quit. The system announces Cancel and ends the VR session. You can also press the button on the steering wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, press the volume control switches (+ or -) on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.

In most cases you can interrupt the voice feedback to speak the next command by pressing the button on the steering wheel.

To speed the operation you can say multiple commands. For example, press the button then say Phonebook, New entry rather than Phonebook. Wait for the voice feedback prompt then say New entry.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer to the following rules and examples.

Either zero or oh can be used for 0.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

One eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh, or

One eight zero zero six six two six two oh oh

Words can be used for the first 4 digits places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

One eight hundred six six two six two oh oh,

NOT One eight hundred six six two sixty two hundred, and

NOT One eight oh oh six six two sixty two hundred.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

Numbers can be spoken in small groups. The system will prompt you to continue en- tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

One eight zero zero

The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more.

six six two

The system repeats the numbers and prompts you to enter more.

six two zero zero

Say pound for #. Say star for * (avail- able when using the Call International command and the Send command during a call).

Say plus for + (available only when using the Call International command).

Say pause for a 2 second pause (available only when storing a phone book number).

You can say star for * and pound for # at any time in any position of the phone number (available only when using Call In- ternational command).

See List of voice commands and Interna- tional in this section for more information.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

One five five five one two one two star one two three

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as single digits.

The voice command Help is available at any time. Please use the Help command to get information on how to use the system.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth Hands- Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initiate a VR session or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to skip through system feedback and to enter commands during a call. See List of voice commands and During a call later in this section for more information.

LHA2463

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE/END

Press the button to cancel a VR session or end a call.

GETTING STARTED The following procedures will help you get started using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad- ditional command options, refer to List of voice commands in this section.

Choosing a language You can interact with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: Press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif- ferent language.

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode later in this section.

4. The system announces the current language and gives you the option to change the lan- guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in French). Use the following chart to select the language.

NOTE:

You must press the button or the button within 5 seconds to change the language.

Current language

Press (PHONE/SEND)

to select

Press (PHONE/END)

to select English Spanish French Spanish English French French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, do not press either button. After 5 seconds, the VR session will end, and the language will not be changed.

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu

Setup A

Pair phone B

New phone C

Initiate from handset D

Name phone E

Assign priority F

Choose ringtone G

1. Press the button on the steering wheel. The system announces the available commands.

2. Say: Setup A . The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

3. Say: Pair phone B . The system acknowl- edges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

4. Say: New phone C . The system acknowl- edges the command and asks you to initiate pairing from the phone handset D .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone model. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc- tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel- lular phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter 1234 from the handset. The Passkey code 1234 has been assigned by NISSAN and cannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for the phone E .

If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired and the name sounds too much like a name already used, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

6. The system asks you to assign a priority level F . The priority level determines which phone is active when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the system or

refer to Setup later in this section for more information on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to select a custom ring tone G . Follow the instruc- tions provided by the system or refer to Setup later in this section for more infor- mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phone number

Main Menu

Call A

Number (speak digits) B

Dial C

1. Press the button on the steering wheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: Call A . The system acknowledges the command and announces the next set of available commands.

Say: Call International to dial more than 10 digits or any special characters.

3. Say the number you wish to call starting with the area code in single digit format B . If the system has trouble recognizing the correct phone number, try entering the number in the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-

ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as five five five as the 1st group, then one two one as the 2nd group, and three three five four as the 3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, say In- ternational. See How to say numbers in this section, for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking the phone number, the system repeats it back and an- nounces the available commands.

5. Say: Dial C . The system acknowledges the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see List of voice commands in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you hear the ring tone, press the button on the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see List of voice commands later in this section.

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu

Call or Call International

Phone Book

Memo Pad

Setup

When you press and release the button on the steering wheel, you can choose from the commands on the Main Menu. The following pages describe these commands and the com- mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before speaking.

You can say Help to hear the list of commands currently available any time the system is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it, you can say Cancel or Quit at any time the system is waiting for a response. The system will end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say Go back or Correction any time the system is waiting for a response.

When you get used to the menus in the system, you can talk ahead by saying more than one command at a time. For example, say, Call five five five one two one two or Memo pad record.

Also, when you get used to the system re- sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by pressing the button on the steering wheel. However, if you press the button when the system is waiting for a response from you it will end the VR session.

Call

Main Menu

Call or Call International

Name (speak name) A

Number (speak digits) B

Redial C

Call Back D

Name (speak name) A

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you can dial a number associated with a name and location.

See Phone book later in this section to learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the phone book entry you wish to call. The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with the name, the system asks you to choose the loca- tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location, the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits) B

When prompted by the system, say the number you wish to call. Refer to How to say numbers and Making a call by entering a phone number in this section for more details.

Redial C

Use the Redial command to call the last number that was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last number dialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re- peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system announces, There is no number to redial and ends the VR session.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Call back D

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re- peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the system announces, There is no number to call backand ends the VR session.

International

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special characters, please say international. When the system acknowledges the command, the system will prompt you to speak the number.

During a call

During a call there are several command options available. Press the button on the steering wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com- mands.

Help The system announces the avail- able commands.

Go back/Correction The system an- nounces Go back, ends the VR session and returns to the call.

Cancel/Quit The system announces Cancel, ends the VR session and returns to the call.

Send/Enter/Call/Dial Use the Send command to enter numbers, * or # during a call. For example, if you were directed to dial an extension by an automated system:

Say: Send one two three four.

The system acknowledges the command and sends the tones associated with the numbers. The system then ends the VR ses- sion and returns to the call. Say star for *, Say pound for #.

Transfer call Use the Transfer Call com- mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, Transfer call. Call transferred to privacy mode. The system then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com- mand again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle.

Mute Use the Mute command to mute your voice so the other party cannot hear it. Use the mute command again to unmute your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone network connection is lost while the Mute feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset to off for the next call so the other party can hear your voice.

Phone book

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not available when the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu

Phone Book

New Entry A

Edit B

Delete C

List Names D

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each phone paired with the system. Each name can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ- ated with it.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone book. You cannot access Phone As phone book if you are currently connected with Phone B.

New entry A

Use the New Entry command to store a new name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: Mary. If the name is too long or too short, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name already stored, the system tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and you confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location (Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: Home. The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phones memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: five five five one two one two. See How to say numbers in this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phones memory:

Say Transfer entry. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose Store.

The system confirms the name, location and number. The system then asks if you would like to store another location for the same name. If you do not wish to store another location, the system ends the VR session.

Edit B

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name of the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asks you for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phone number or to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phones memory.

Enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: five five five one two one two. See How to say numbers in this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular phones memory:

Say Transfer entry. The system acknowledges the command and asks you to initiate the transfer from the phone handset. The new contact phone number will be transferred from the cellular phone via the Bluetooth communication link.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

The transfer procedure varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you for the next command. When you have finished entering numbers, choose Store.

The system confirms the name, location and number, then announces that the entry has been stored. The system then ends the VR session.

Delete C

Use the Delete command to erase one entry from the phone book, all entries from the phone book, the current redial number or the current call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book, say a name or All entries when prompted by the sys- tem.

The system acknowledges the command and asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call back number, say redial number or call back num- ber when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, the system deletes them without asking for confirma- tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying to delete, the system says so and ends the VR session.

List names D

Use the List Names command to hear all the names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but does not include the actual phone numbers. When the playback of the list is complete, the system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time by pressing the button on the steering wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Memo pad

Main Menu

Memo Pad

Record A

Play B

Delete C

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice memos, each up to 20 seconds long.

Record A

The system announces Recording and a tone sounds, signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.

When you are done, press the or button on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces Memo recorded. Another tone sounds to end the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish to record over the oldest memo.

Play B

The system plays back all the memos in the order of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an- nounces No messages to play. The system ends the VR session.

Delete C

The Delete command erases all memos. The system asks you to confirm this action before deleting all memos.

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Setup

Main Menu

Setup

Pair Phone A

List Phone B

Select Phone C

Change Priority D

Delete Phone E

Select Ringtone F

Bluetooth Off G

Use the Setup command to change options as- sociated with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

Pair phone A

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat- ible phone to the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be cancelled. Also, see Pairing procedure in this section for ad- ditional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a sixth phone, the system announces that you must first delete one phone or replace an existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already been paired to your vehicles system, the system an- nounces the name the phone is already using. The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from the following commands:

New phone Refer to Pairing proce- dure in this section.

Replace phone The system announces the names of the phones already paired and asks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone you wish to replace, the pairing procedure will begin. Refer to Pairing procedure in this section.

List phone See the description below.

List phone B

Use the List Phone command to hear the names of the phones currently paired. If no phones are paired, the system announces, No paired phones to list. The system then ends the VR session.

Select phone C

Use the Select Phone command to select a phone of lesser priority when two or more phones paired with Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone and confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selected phone remains active until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or you select a new phone.

Change priority D

Use the Change Priority command to change the priority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac- tive when more than one paired Bluetooth phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the active phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already being used for another phone, the two phones will swap priority levels.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone A Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone C Priority Level 2 = Phone B Priority Level 3 = Phone A

Delete phone E

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a specific phone or all phones from the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phones already paired with the system and their priority level. The system then gives you the option to delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones, the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated phone book for that phone will also be deleted.

Select ringtone F

Use the Select Ringtone command to select the tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is received.

The system announces the name of the active phone and asks you to choose from the following commands:

Ringtone The system plays a ringtone and asks if you would like to select that tone. If you say No, the system plays the next ringtone available and continues to cycle through the ringtones until you select one or quit.

Silent The system asks you to confirm your wish to disable the ringtone.

Bluetooth off G

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

When the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys- tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you will not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and access Setup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of- dialect users to train the system to improve rec- ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, the users can create a voice model of their own voice that is stored in the system. The system is capable of storing a different speaker adaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will use memory A to store the model. If memory A is in use and memory B is available, the system will use memory B to store the model. If both of the memory locations are in use, the system will ask the user to select which memory location should be overwritten.

Training procedure The procedure for training a voice is as follows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the drivers seat with the engine run- ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis- sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for more than 5 seconds.

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. The system announces: Press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the hands-free phone system to enter the speaker adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif- ferent language.

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan- guage, see Choosing a language earlier in this section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected automatically. If both memory locations are already in use, the system will prompt you to overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro- vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are ready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell you an adequate number of phrases have been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name. Follow the instructions to register your name.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad- aptation has been completed and the sys- tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

The button is pressed for more than 5 seconds in SA mode.

The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

Training phrases During the SA mode, the system instructs the trainer to say the following phrases. (The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

phone book new entry

dial three oh four two nine

delete call back number

setup pair phone

memo pad play

eight pause nine three two pause seven

delete all entries

call seven two four zero nine

phone book delete entry

memo pad record

dial star two one seven oh

Yes

No

select ring tone

dial eight five six nine two

Bluetooth on

setup change priority

call three one nine oh two

nine seven pause pause three oh eight

Cancel

call back number

call star two zero nine five

delete phone

dial eight three zero five one

Home

four three pause two nine pause zero

delete redial number

phone book list names

call eight oh five four one

Correction

setup change ring tone

dial seven four oh one eight

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

setup main menu

Delete

dial nine seven two six six

memo pad delete

call seven six three oh one

go back

call five six two eight zero

dial six six four three seven

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are en- countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See List of voice commands in this section. 2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone. 3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized. 5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately. 6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im- prove the recognition response for the speaker. See Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by using the List Names command. See Phone book in this section. 2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.

If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- patible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con- necting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected with the in-vehicle

LHA2556

BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with the connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the phone commands, so dialing a phone number using your voice is possible. For more details, see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this sec- tion.

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes.

Set up the wireless connection between a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.

Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- mended phone list and connecting.

You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:

Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser- vice area.

Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a moun- tainous area.

Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other persons voice dur- ing a call.

Immediately after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, it may be impos- sible to receive a call for a short period of time.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth wireless connection, the bat- tery power of the cellular phone may dis- charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.

If the hands-free phone system seems to be malfunctioning, see Troubleshooting guide in this section. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- shooting help.

Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Stor- ing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Refer to the cellular phone owners manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.

The signal strength display on the monitor will not coincide with the signal strength display of some cellular phones.

If reception between callers is unclear, ad- justing the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve the clarity. See Call volume in this section.

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCCs RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- tions.

Operation is subject to the following two con- ditions:

1. This device may not cause interference and

2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde- sired operation of the device.

IC Regulatory information

Operation is subject to the following two con- ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all re- quirements of the Canadian Interference- Causing Equipment Regulations.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Clarion.

VOICE COMMANDS You can use voice commands to operate various Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System features using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For more details, see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE 1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display.

LHA1236

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

2. Select the Connect Bluetooth key. 3. A popup box will appear on the screen, prompting you to confirm that the connec- tion is for the phone system. Select the Yes key.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen, operate the Bluetooth cellular phone to enter the PIN code.

The connecting procedure of the cellular phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owners Manual for details. You can also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on connecting recommended cellular phones.

When the connecting is complete, the screen will return to the Bluetooth settings screen.

LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1318

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

This vehicle has two phonebooks available for your use. Depending on your phone, the system may automatically download your entire cell phones phonebook into the Handset Phone- book. For the details on downloading your phonebook, see Handset phonebook in this section. If your phonebook does not automati- cally download, you may set up the vehicle phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook allows you to record a name to speak while using voice recognition.

1. Push the PHONE button and select the Ve- hicle Phonebook key.

2. Select the Add New key at the top of the screen.

3. Choose the method for entering the phone- book entry. For this example, select Enter Number by Keypad.

4. Enter the digits and select the OK key. For more information, see How to use the touchscreen in this section.

5. Select the Voicetag key to record a name to speak when using the Voice Recognition system.

6. Select the Store key and prepare to speak the name after the tone.

7. When the voicetag is successfully saved ( ), select the OK key to save the phonebook entry.

8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will show a screen that is ready to call the num- ber. Press the BACK button to return to the Vehicle Phonebook.

LHA1320 LHA1321 LHA1381

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

Copy from Call History The system will show a list of your incoming, outgoing or missed calls that were down- loaded from your cell phone (depending on your phones compatibility). You may select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook.

Copy from the Handset The system will show your cell phones phonebook that was downloaded (depend- ing on your phones compatibility). You may select one of these entries to save in the vehicle phonebook.

Editing the Vehicle Phonebook

1. Push the PHONE button and select the Ve- hicle Phonebook key.

2. Select the desired entry from the displayed list.

3. Select the Edit key.

4. Select the desired item to change.

The following editing items are available:

Entry # Changes the displayed number of the se- lected entry.

Name Edit the name of the entry using the keypad displayed on the screen.

Number Edit the phone number using the keypad displayed on the screen.

Type Select the icon from the icon list.

LHA1382 LHA1383

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voicetag Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For more information, see NISSAN Voice Recognition System in this section.

To delete an entry, select the Delete key at step 3.

HANDSET PHONEBOOK Many phones will support an automatic down- load of the cellular phones phonebook. Since this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be stored and entries are automatically assigned voice tags by the system, this is a useful function for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni- tion system.

Transferring the handset phonebook If your cellular phone supports automatic down- loading, the system transfers the handset phone- book automatically by default. To ensure that this feature is activated, press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key. The Auto Downloaded selection should have the amber indicator next to the word ON activated. Select the Auto Downloaded key to toggle this feature on or off.

To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle manually, follow these steps:

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru- ment panel.

2. Select the Phone key.

3. Select the Download Handset Phonebook key.

Once the handset phonebook is transferred to the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing the PHONE key on the instrument panel or the button on the steering wheel, then selecting the Handset Phonebook key.

Whether the handset phonebook is transferred manually or automatically, the process can take up to five minutes to complete, depending on the size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular phones owners manual for more details.

LHA1319

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel or the switch on the steering wheel. The Phone screen will appear on the display.

2. Select one of the following options to make a call:

Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

Handset Phonebook: Select the name from an entry stored in the handset phonebook.

Call History: Select the name from the in- coming or outgoing call history.

Dial Number: Input the phone number manu- ally using a keypad displayed on the screen. For information on how to use the touch- screen, see How to use the touchscreen in this section.

3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except Dial Number, dialing commences when the listed name is selected. Dialing commences when OK is selected if the number is input- ted manually. The screen changes to the Call in Progress screen.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the following to finish the call:

a. Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress screen.

b. Press the switch on the steering wheel.

c. When the Call in Progress screen is displayed, press the PHONE button on the instrument panel to hang up. If any other screen is currently displayed, press the PHONE button to display the Call in Progress screen first, then press the PHONE button again to hang up.

RECEIVING A CALL When you hear a phone ring, the display will change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow one of the procedures listed below.

a. Select the Answer key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel.

c. Press the phone button on the steering wheel switches.

LHA1322 LHA1323

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

There are some options available when receiving a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen.

Answer: Accept an incoming call to talk.

Hold Call: Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call: Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, follow one of the procedures listed below:

a. Select the Reject Call key on the display.

b. Press the PHONE button on the instrument panel.

c. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel switches.

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call. Select one of the following displayed on the screen, if necessary:

Hang up: Finish the call.

Use Handset: Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute: Mute your voice to the person.

Keypad: Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed. For example, entering your PIN number for voice- mail.

NOTE:

Pushing the TALK switch on the steering wheel during a call allows num- bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec- ognition.

Cancel Mute: This will appear after the Mute key is selected. Mute will be cancelled.

Switch Call: Select Switch Call to answer another incoming call. By selecting Hang Up, you can end a call and can speak to a caller who is on hold again.

This function may not be useable, depend- ing on the model of phone.

To adjust the persons voice to be louder or quieter, press the volume control switch located on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume control knob on the instrument panel while talking on the phone. This adjustment is also available in the SETTING mode.

LHA2074

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

ENDING A CALL To finish the call, perform one of the following procedures:

Select the Hang up key on the Call in Progress display.

Push the switch on the steering wheel.

When the Call in Progress screen is dis- played, press the PHONE button on the instrument panel to hang up. If any other screen is currently displayed, press the PHONE button to display the Call in Prog- ress screen first, then press the PHONE button again to hang up.

PHONE SETTINGS

To set up the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System to your preferred settings, press the SET- TING button on the instrument panel and select the Phone key on the display.

Edit Vehicle Phonebook: See Vehicle Phonebook in this section for add- ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle phonebook.

Delete Phonebook: Delete a phonebook stored on the system.

Download Handset Phonebook: See Handset Phonebook in this section for adding, editing and deleting contacts in the handset phonebook.

LHA1324 LHA1319

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Volume & Ringtone: Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming call sound and outgoing call sound. When the Automatic Hold option is turned on, an incom- ing call will be placed on hold automatically after several rings. When the Vehicle Ringtone op- tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ- ent from the cellular phones will sound when receiving a call.

Auto Downloaded: See Handset Phonebook in this section for information about automatically downloading the handset phonebook.

BLUETOOTH SETTINGS To set up the Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System to your preferred settings, press the SET- TING button on the instrument panel and select the Bluetooth key on the display.

Bluetooth: Turn the Bluetooth system on or off.

Connect Bluetooth: See Connecting procedure in this section for more information about connecting a phone.

Connected Devices: Display a list of the Bluetooth devices con- nected to the system.

Edit Bluetooth Info: Check information about the device name, device address and device PIN.

Replace Connected Phone: Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows you to keep any voic- etags that were recorded using the previous phone.

LHA1325 LHA1316

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

CALL VOLUME Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume may improve clarity if reception between callers is unclear.

Incoming call adjusting this setting allows you to hear a difference in volume.

Outgoing call adjusting this setting allows the person you are talking with to hear a difference in volume.

To access the settings, press the SETTING but- ton, then select Volume & Beeps.

You can also adjust the volume of an incoming voice during a call by pushing the volume control switch on the steering wheel or by turning the volume control knob on the instrument panel.

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free operation of the systems equipped on this ve- hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.

There are two voice recognition modes of opera- tion available. They are:

Standard Mode

Alternate Command Mode

In Standard Mode (the factory default setting), commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system. You can complete your desired operation by simply following the prompts given by the system. Not all NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available while in Standard Mode.

For advanced operation, you can change to an Alternate Command Mode that enables the op- eration of the display and audio system through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this mode is active, an expanded list of commands can be spoken after pushing the TALK switch on the steering wheel, and the voice command menu prompts are turned off.

In Alternate Command Mode the recognition success rate may be affected because the num- ber of available commands and the ways of speaking each command are increased. See NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com- mand Mode in this section.

LHA1253

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To improve the recognition success rate when Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the Speaker Adaptation Function available in that mode. See Speaker Adaptation Function in this section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter- nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard Mode be used for the best recognition perfor- mance.

While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys- tem for certain Phone and Navigation features, you can switch to using manual controls (touch- screen, NISSAN controller, steering wheel con- trols) and the information you have already en- tered by voice control will be retained. To switch to manual controls, select the Manual Controls key on the display when it appears. The system will respond by speaking Changing to manual operation. Please use manual controls to con- tinue.

For the voice commands for the navigation sys- tem, refer to the Navigation System Owners Manual of your vehicle.

For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting is the Standard Mode. See Standard Mode in this section. For vehicles in Canada, the factory default setting is the Alternate Command Mode. See Alternate Command Mode in this section.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION STANDARD MODE The Standard Mode enables control of naviga- tion, phone and vehicle information. With this setting active, commands that are available are always shown on the display and announced by the system.

Displaying user guide If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for the first time or you do not know how to operate it, you can display the User Guide for confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the Others key.

3. Select the Voice Recognition key.

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing the button and saying Help.

4. Select the User Guide key.

5. Select an item.

LHA1326

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

Available items:

Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system.

Lets Practice

Initiates a practice session that demon- strates how to improve voice recognition by the system.

Using the Address Book

Tutorial for using the Address Book

Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for entering a destination by street address.

Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation.

Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correct command recognition by the system.

Getting started Before using the Voice Recognition system for the first time, you can confirm how to use com- mands by viewing the Getting Started section of the User Guide.

1. Select the Getting Started key.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller or touching the page down key.

Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec- ognition system

If you choose Finding a Street Address, Using the Address Book or Placing Calls, you can view tutorials on how to perform these operations using Voice Recognition.

LHA1329

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Lets Practice The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows you to practice saying commands and receive feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your speech.

To initiate a practice session, access the User Guide and select the Lets Practice key. Follow the on-screen prompts until the session is com- plete. After the session is completed, a screen will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ- ent elements of your speech. Select the Try Again to repeat the session if improvement is needed. Select the Done key to return to the User Guide screen.

Useful tips for correct operation You can display useful speaking tips to help the system recognize your voice commands cor- rectly.

1. Select Help on Speaking.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller or touching the page down key.

LHA1327 LHA1328 LHA1330

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

Voice recognition settings The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec- ognition system are described.

1. Select Voice Recognition.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the screen using the NISSAN controller.

USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the switch is pressed before the initializa- tion completes, voice commands will not be ac- cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec- ognition initialization is completed.

BEFORE STARTING To get the best recognition performance from Voice Recognition, observe the following:

The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi- bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from correctly recognizing the voice commands.

Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command.

Speak in a natural conversational voice with- out pausing between words.

If the air conditioner is set to Auto, the fan speed is automatically lowered so that your commands can be recognized more easily.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Press the switch located on the steer- ing wheel.

LHA1331 LHA2555

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces, Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information, Audio or Help?

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the screen changes from to , speak a command.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts and speak after the tone sounds until your desired operation is completed.

Operating tips Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the icon is .

Commands that are available are always shown on the display and spoken through voice menu prompts. Commands other than those that are displayed are not accepted. Please follow the prompts given by the system.

If the command is not recognized, the sys- tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

Press the switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen.

If you want to cancel the command, press and hold the switch. The message, Voice cancelled will be announced.

If you want to adjust the volume of the sys- tem feedback, push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

When saying the phone number 800-662- 6200, the system will accept eight-hundred in addition to eight zero zeroor eight oh oh. 500, 700, and 900 are also supported.

Examples:

1-800-662-6200

One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero

One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone numbers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers. For example, when you try to call 800- 662-6200, say eight zero zero first, and the sys- tem will then ask you for the next three digits. Then, say six six two. After recognition, the system will then ask for the last four digits. Say, six two zero zero. Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition performance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak the number 0 as zero or oh. If the letter O is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero.

LHA1333

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

Standard Mode command list Category Command:

COMMAND ACTION Phone Displays Phone function commands. Navigation Displays Navigation function commands. Information Displays Vehicle Information. Audio Displays Audio commands. Help Displays User Guide.

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTION Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits. Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry). Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook. Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook. Call History Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs. International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

Navigation Command:

COMMAND ACTION Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book. Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only). Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location. Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book. Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle Information Command:

COMMAND ACTION Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information. Maintenance Displays Maintenance information. Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off. Where am I? Displays current vehicle location.

Audio Command:

COMMAND ACTION AM Changes the audio system mode to AM radio. FM Changes the audio system mode to FM radio. XM Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio. CD Changes the audio system mode to CD.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

Voice command examples Some basic voice command examples are de- scribed here.

For navigation system commands, see the sepa- rate Navigation System Owners Manual.

Example 1 Placing a call to the phone number 800-662-6200:

1. Press the switch located on the steer- ing wheel.

2. The system announces, Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au- dio or Help?

3. Say Phone.

LHA2555 LHA1333

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

4. Say Dial Number. 5. Say 800. 6. The system announces, Please say the next three digits or dial, or say change number.

7. Say 662.

LHA1334 LHA1335 LHA1336

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

8. The system announces, Please say the last four digits or say change number.

9. Say 6200.

10. The system announces, Dial or Change Number?

11. Say Dial.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

NOTE:

You can also speak 800-662-6200 (10 continuous digits) or 662-6200 (7 con- tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec- essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is recommended for improved recognition. See How to speak numbers in this section.

You can only say a phone number using the 3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using this command. Please use the International Call command for all other formats, and when special characters such as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.

If you say Change Number during phone number entry, the system will automatically request that you repeat the number using the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the area code first and then follow the prompts.

Do not add a 1 in front of the area code when speaking phone numbers.

If the system does not recognize your com- mand, please try repeating the command using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or too loudly may further decrease recognition performance.

LHA1337 LHA1338

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Example 2 Placing an international call to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

1. Press the switch located on the steer- ing wheel.

2. The system announces, Would you like to access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au- dio or Help?

3. Say Phone.

4. Say International Call. LHA2555 LHA1333 LHA1334

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

5. Say 011811112223333. 6. Say Dial.

7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111- 222-3333.

NOTE:

Any digit input format is available in the International Number input process, as well as the special characters such as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE The Alternate Command Mode enables control of the audio and display systems as well as additional commands for the Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation systems. With this setting active, the system does not announce or display the available commands at each step.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an expanded list of commands can be used after pushing the TALK switch. Under this mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands is not available on the display. Please review the expanded command list, available when this mode is active, as some Standard Mode com- mands are replaced. Please see examples of Alternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognition success rate may be affected as the number of available commands and ways of speaking each command are increased. You can turn this mode ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options.

LHA1339 LHA1340

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Activating Alternate Command Mode 1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-

ment panel.

2. Select the Others key on the display.

3. Select the Voice Recognition key.

4. Select the Alternate Command Mode key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on the screen. Select the OK key to activate the Alternate Command Mode.

6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and the setting menu is expanded to include the Alternate Command Mode options. See Settings menu in this section for an expla- nation of the options.

Displaying the command list If you are controlling the system by voice com- mands for the first time or do not know the appropriate voice command, perform the follow- ing procedure for displaying the voice command list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

Press the switch, listen for the tone and say, Help. The system will respond by display- ing the command list main menu.

LHA1248 LHA1331 LHA1341

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

Only manual controls such as the touchscreen can navigate the command list menu.

As an alternative to the voice command Help, you may access the command list using the fol- lowing steps:

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the Others key using the NISSAN controller.

3. Select the Voice Recognition key using the NISSAN controller.

NOTE:

You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say Help.

4. Select the Command List key using the NISSAN controller.

5. Select a category using the NISSAN con- troller. The command list for the category selected is shown.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the NISSAN controller to view the entire list.

7. Press the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

LHA1342 LHA1231 LHA1342

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Alternate Command Mode command list

Phone Command:

COMMAND ACTION Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits. Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook. Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook. International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+). Call Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either the Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook. Please say Call followed by a stored

name. Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls. Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls. Missed Calls Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.

Navigation Command:

COMMAND ACTION Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book. Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only). Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location. Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book. Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination. Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route. Minimize Freeway Route Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage. Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time. Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance. Cancel Route Cancels the current route. Delete Destination Deletes the current destination. Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

COMMAND ACTION Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view. North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen. Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen. Zoom In <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a smaller number. Zoom Out <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a larger number. Guidance Voice ON/OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off. Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.

Information Command:

COMMAND ACTION Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information. Maintenance Display Maintenance information. Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off. Where am I? Displays the current vehicle location. Weather Information Displays weather information. Weather Map Displays the current weather map.

Audio Command:

COMMAND ACTION AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played. FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played. XM Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played. CD Starts to play a CD. USB Turns to the USB audio input. Bluetooth Audio Turns to the Bluetooth audio system. AUX Turns to the AUX input.

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Displaying user guide You can confirm how to use voice commands by accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice commands.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument panel.

2. Select the Others key.

3. Select the Voice Recognition key.

4. Select the User Guide key.

5. Select an item.

Available items:

Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate the Voice Recognition system.

Lets Practice

Initiates a practice session that demon- strates how to improve recognition by the system.

Using the Address Book

Tutorial for using the Address Book.

Finding a Street Address

Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.

Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice command operation.

Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly speak commands in order for them to be properly recognized by the system.

Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available Voice Recognition settings.

Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial for adapting the system to your voice.

LHA1343 LHA1344

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

USING THE SYSTEM Initialization When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which takes a few seconds. When completed, the system is ready to accept voice commands. If the switch is pressed before the initializa- tion completes, the display will show the mes- sage: System not ready. or a beep sounds.

Before starting To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the following:

Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands cor- rectly.

When the climate control is in the AUTO mode, the fan speed decreases automati- cally for easy recognition.

Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a command.

Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

Giving voice commands

1. Press and release the button located on the steering wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on the screen, and the system announces, Please say a command from the displayed list or say Help to show all commands.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak a command.

4. Once a command is recognized, the system will announce the recognized command and perform the requested action.

If the command is not recognized, the sys- tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the command in a clear voice after the tone.

LHA2555 LHA1345

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips Say a command after the tone. Voice com-

mands cannot be accepted when the icon is .

If the command is not recognized, the sys- tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the command in a clear voice.

Press the switch on the steering wheel to return to the previous screen.

If you want to cancel the command, press and hold the switch. The message, Voice cancelled will be announced.

If you want to adjust the volume of the sys- tem feedback, push the volume control switch on the steering wheel or use the audio system volume knob while the system is making an announcement.

To minimize the amount of prompts spoken by the system in Alternate Command Mode, use the Minimize Voice Feedback function. To access the Minimize Voice Feedback function press the SETTING button, then select the Others key. Then select the Voice Recognition key.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires a certain way to speak numbers when giving voice commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule:

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

When saying the phone number 800-662- 6200, the system will accept eight- hundred in addition to eight zero zero or eight oh oh. 500, 700, and 900 are also supported.

Examples:

1-800-662-6200

One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero

One eight hundred six six two six two zero zero

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:

You can improve the recognition of phone num- bers by saying the phone number in three groups of numbers. For example, when you try to call 800-662-6200, say eight zero zero first, and the system will then ask you for the next three digits. Then, say six six two. After recognition, the system will then ask for the last four digits.

Say, six two zero zero. Using this method of phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor- mance.

NOTE:

When speaking a house number, speak the number 0 as zero or oh. If the letter O is included in the house number, it will not be recognized as 0 even if you speak oh instead of zero.

Settings menu The content of the Settings Menu differs when the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.

Command List:

Displays the command list for Alternate Com- mand Mode.

User Guide:

The user guide provides basic instructions for using Voice Recognition and accessing some voice commands.

NOTE:

The user guide can also be accessed from within the INFO menu after pressing the INFO button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141

Speaker Adaptation:

Starts a system training procedure to learn the specific sounds of your voice. See Speaker ad- aptation function in this section.

Alternate Command Mode:

For advanced operation, an Alternate Command Mode is provided. This setting enables control of the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi- tion to additional commands for the Phone and Navigation systems. With this setting active, the system does not announce or display the avail- able commands at each step. When this mode is activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will change to show more options.

Minimize Voice Feedback:

Reduces the amount of the information spoken for each voice instruction.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION The Voice Recognition system has a function to learn the users voice for better voice recognition performance. The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the users voice

1. Press the SETTING button on the instru- ment panel, select the Others key on the display.

2. Select the Voice Recognition key.

3. Select the Speaker Adaptation key.

4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo- rized by the system.

LHA1341 LHA1346

4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5. Select a category to be learned by the sys- tem from the following list:

Phone

Navigation

Information

Audio

Help

The voice commands in the category are displayed.

6. Select a voice command to train.

The Voice Recognition system starts.

7. The system requests that you repeat a com- mand after a tone. This command is also displayed on the screen.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak the command that the system requested.

9. When the system has recognized the voice command, the voice of the user is learned.

Press the switch or the BACK button to return to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command correctly, the voice command indicator on the screen turns on.

Speaker Adaptation function settings Edit Name:

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on the screen.

Reset Result:

Resets the users voice that the Voice Recogni- tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning:

When this item is turned to ON, you can have the system learn the voice commands in succession, without selecting commands one by one.

LHA1347 LHA2457 LHA1349

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-143

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are en- countered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution Displays COMMAND NOT RECOG- NIZED or the system fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Standard Mode command list or Alternate Command Mode command list in this section.

2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level. 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System in this section.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

4-144 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 NISSAN Intelligent Key (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 5-10 Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Engine protection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Automatic transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Using four wheel drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Transfer case shifting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 5-36 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

WARNING

Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger- ous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all win- dows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen- ger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but- ton to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

If electrical wiring or other cable con- nections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the lift gate or the body, follow the manufacturers recommen- dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- try into the vehicle.

The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, un- derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously re- duce the three-way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- able loss of performance or other un- usual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer.

Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

Do not race the engine while warming it up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen- ger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to per- form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautions later in this section.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and in- flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Starting and driving 5-3

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alter- nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac- ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information:

The TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted in all 4 tires. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap- pears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illumi- nated and low tire pressure is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicles operation and the outside temperature. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illumi- nate. If the warning light illuminates in low ambient temperature, check the tire pres- sure for all 4 tires.

The Tire and Loading Information label (also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label) is located in the drivers door opening.

You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures dis- played on the screen does not correspond with the actual order of the tire position. See Tire pressure information in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone, and voice recognition systems section.

For additional information, see Low tire pressure warning light in the Instruments and controls section, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the In case of emergency section.

5-4 Starting and driving

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under- inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci- dent and could result in serious per- sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (See Flat tire in the In case of emergency section for changing a flat tire.)

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu- minate.

Some examples are:

Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in- terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modification not ex- pressly approved by the party respon- sible for compliance could void the us- ers authority to operate the equipment.

Starting and driving 5-5

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer- ence, and

2. This device must accept any interfer- ence, include interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

3. The term IC: before the radio certifi- cation number only signifies that In- dustry Canada technical specifications were met.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma- neuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or

cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- scription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli- sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally leave the road surface, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve- hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve- hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap- propriate driving lane.

If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow-out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.

5-6 Starting and driving

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain- ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. See Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows-out while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the ve- hicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.

The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire.

Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.

Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not over react.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel- erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and either contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire or see Changing a flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- duces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al- though the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre- scription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco- hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa- ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve- hicle.

Remember that two-wheel drive models are less capable than four-wheel drive models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

Starting and driving 5-7

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.

Do not drive across steep slopes. In- stead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.

Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. If you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.

Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident.

If your engine stalls or you cannot make it to the top of a steep hill, never at- tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.

Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an acci- dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed.

Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Prop- erly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.

To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack and evenly distribute the load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as far forward and as low as possible. Do not equip the ve- hicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your ve- hicle to roll over.

Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move sud- denly and injure your hands. Instead drive with your fingers and thumbs on the outside of the rim.

Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.

Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- fected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.

Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with 4WD engaged.

For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve- hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

5-8 Starting and driving

Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unex- pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per- sonal injury.

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle has a higher center of gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not de- signed for cornering at the same speeds as passenger cars.

Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.

Be sure to check the brakes immedi- ately after driving in mud or water. See Brake system later in this section for Wet brakes.

Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you could be injured.

Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. See Periodic mainte- nance in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

WARNING

Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steer- ing wheel will lock (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious ve- hicle damage or personal injury.

Never place the ignition switch in the LOCK position while driving. The steer- ing wheel will lock (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious ve- hicle damage or personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-9

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY (if so equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK until the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When turning the ignition switch, make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

If the shift selector is not returned to the P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be moved toward LOCK.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to- ward the LOCK position when the Intelligent Key is in range, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON direction.

3. Turn the switch toward the LOCK position.

The shift selector can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCK and ACC, although it does not show on the ignition switch. When the ignition switch is OFF, the steering wheel is not locked (for models with a steering wheel lock mechanism).

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock- wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. To unlock the steering wheel, push the ignition switch in and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be turned from the LOCK position, even using the me- chanical key.

Operating range

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis- charged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys- tems operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn the ignition switch to start the engine.

LSD0171 LSD2001

5-10 Starting and driving

The operating range of the engine start function is inside of the vehicle 1 .

The luggage area is not included in the op- erating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.

If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru- ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.

If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS Push in the ignition switch to the B position when you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) A :

The ignition switch can only be locked in the LOCK position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed in, and turned to the ACC position C while carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories) C :

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) D :

This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.

START E :

This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the ignition switch immediately. It will automatically return to the ON position.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back to the LOCK position unless the shift selector is in the P (Park) position. (It can be turned only to the B position.)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in ACC or ON positions when the engine is not running for an extended pe- riod. This can discharge the battery.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION The ignition lock is designed so the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position and the key cannot be removed until the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition switch, make sure the shift selector is in the P (Park) position.

If the shift selector is not returned to P (Park) position, the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position.

WSD0041

Starting and driving 5-11

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion with the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion.

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion.

3. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

If the shift selector is shifted to the P (Park) position after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or when the ignition switch cannot be placed in the LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park) position.

2. Place the ignition switch slightly toward the ON position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion.

4. Remove the key.

The shift selector is designed so it cannot move out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position or if the key is removed from the switch.

The shift selector can be moved if the igni- tion switch is in the ON position and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position is indicated by a 1 on the ignition switch. For models without NISSAN vehicle immo- bilizer system: when the ignition switch is in the OFF position, the steering wheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clockwise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignition to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the steer- ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK posi- tion, turn the steering wheel to the left or right while turning the key to unlock the key cylinder.

KEY POSITIONS LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories such as the radio when the engine is not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as the engine has started, release the key. It automati- cally returns to the ON position.

5-12 Starting and driving

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following pro- cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- rate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least when- ever you refuel.

Check that all windows and lights are clean.

Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

Check that all doors are closed.

Position seat and adjust head restraint and headrests (if so equipped).

Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.

Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tion. See Warning/indicator lights and au- dible reminders in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or if the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to operate if the shift selector is in any of the driving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by placing the ignition switch in the START position. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

If the engine is very hard to start in ex- tremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap- proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold it and then crank the engine. Release the key and the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-13

If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine, release the accel- erator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by turn- ing the ignition key to START. Release the key when the engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, turn the key off and wait 10 sec- onds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- onds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 23 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone char- gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

ENGINE PROTECTION MODE The engine has an engine protection mode to reduce the chance of damage if the coolant tem- perature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperature with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer). When the engine temperature reaches a certain level:

The engine coolant temperature gauge will move toward the H position.

Engine power may be reduced.

The air conditioning cooling function may be automatically turned OFF for a short time (the blower will continue to operate).

Engine power and, under some conditions, ve- hicle speed will decrease. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate at the desired speed. The transmission will downshift or upshift as it reaches prescribed shift points. You can also shift manually.

As driving conditions change and engine coolant temperature is reduced, vehicle speed can be increased using the accelerator pedal, and air conditioning cooling function will automatically be turned back ON.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-14 Starting and driving

If:

1. The engine coolant temperature is not re- duced.

2. The air conditioning cooling function does not turn back ON.

3. The engine oil pressure warning/engine coolant temperature high indicator il- luminates, this may indicate a malfunction. Move the vehicle off the road in a safe area and allow the engine to cool. If after check- ing the oil and coolant, the remains on, do not continue to drive and call a NISSAN dealer.

The check engine light may also come ON. If only it remains on, you do not need to have your vehicle towed, but have it inspected soon by a NISSAN dealer. See Check engine light in the Instruments and controls section of this manual.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a col- lision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv- ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer- gency section of this manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause se- rious damage to the engine almost imme- diately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving. This could cause an accident.

Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Starting and driving 5-15

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by de- pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift selector out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift selector into a driving gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position.

To move the shift selector:

: Shift while depressing the brake pedal

: Shift without depressing brake pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift selector out of the P (Park) position.

WSD0187

5-16 Starting and driving

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift selec- tor is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or ACC position for any reason while the vehicle is in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position, then the ignition switch can be turned to LOCK.

P (Park):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift selector into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed to move the shift selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

4 (Fourth gear):

Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta- geous.

Do not downshift into the 4 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow- ing speeds in the 4 position.

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h)

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h)

3 (Third gear):

Use this position for driving up and down long slopes where engine braking would be advanta- geous.

2 (Second gear):

Use this position for hill climbing or engine brak- ing on downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 2 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow- ing speeds in the 2 position.

2WD and AUTO:

71 MPH (115 km/h) w/o tow mode

62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode

4H:

62 MPH (100 km/h) w/o tow mode

62 MPH (100 km/h) w/tow mode

4LO:

31 MPH (50 km/h) w/o tow mode

27 MPH (44 km/h) w/tow mode

Starting and driving 5-17

1 (Low gear):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or slow driving through deep snow, sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 1 position at speeds over the following and do not exceed the follow- ing speeds in the 1 position.

2WD and AUTO:

43 MPH (70 km/h) w/o tow mode

37 MPH (60 km/h) w/tow mode

4H:

43 MPH (70 km/h) w/o tow mode

37 MPH (60 km/h) w/tow mode

4LO:

19 MPH (30 km/h) w/o tow mode

16 MPH (27 km/h) w/tow mode

Shift lock release If the battery is discharged, the shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector, release the shift lock. The shift selector can be moved to N (Neutral). However, the steering wheel will be locked un- less the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tion (for models with a steering lock mechanism). This allows the vehicle to be moved if the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol- lowing procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as shown.

4. Use a protective cloth on the tip of a small screwdriver before inserting it in the shift lock release slot and pushing down.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON position to unlock the steering wheel (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the de- sired location.

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the auto- matic transmission system as soon as possible.

LSD0090

5-18 Starting and driving

WARNING

If the shift selector cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- ing stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift in D position For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis- sion down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe When the fail-safe operation occurs, please note that the transmission will be locked in any of the forward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con- ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for 3 seconds. Then turn the ignition switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer check the transmis- sion and repair it if necessary.

WARNING

Be sure the parking brake is fully re- leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.

Do not use the shift selector in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

Do not leave children unattended in a vehicle. They could release the parking brake and cause an accident.

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-19

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch 2. COAST/SET switch 3. CANCEL switch 4. ONOFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically. The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display then blinks to warn the driver, see Vehicle infor- mation display in the Instruments and con- trols section.

If the SET indicator light blinks, push the cruise control ONOFF switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

The SET indicator light may blink when the cruise control ONOFF switch is pushed ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop- erly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.

In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.

On winding or hilly roads.

On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

LSD0158 LSD2003

CRUISE CONTROL

5-20 Starting and driving

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS The cruise control allows driving at a speed be- tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the ONOFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it. The SET indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the ac- celerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods.

Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator light in the vehicle information display goes out.

Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light goes out.

Push the ONOFF switch off. Both the CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator light in the vehicle information display go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and the SET light in the vehicle information display goes out if:

you depress the brake pedal while pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set speed.

you move the shift selector to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you de- sire, release the switch.

Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do this, the set speed in- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods.

Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- hicle attains the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch and release it.

Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- lease the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

Push and release the COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed de- creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- turns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-21

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and en- sure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in short- ened engine life and reduced engine performance.

Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

Avoid quick starts.

Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain cruising speeds with a constant accelerator position.

Drive at moderate speeds on the highway. Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a safe distance behind other ve- hicles.

Use a proper gear range which suits road conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear as soon as possible.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

Keep your engine tuned up.

Follow the recommended periodic mainte- nance schedule.

Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres- sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Keep the front wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

Air conditioner operation lowers fuel economy. Use the air conditioner only when necessary.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more economical to use the air conditioner and leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

For vehicles equipped with , use 4H or 4L position only when necessary. Four- wheel drive operation lowers fuel economy.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-22 Starting and driving

WARNING

For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at- tempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve- hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states, provinces or territories for emissions testing), or similar equip- ment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected ve- hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:

in the 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the shift selector to the N posi- tion with the brake pedal depressed, and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking.

USING FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)

Starting and driving 5-23

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING PROCEDURES All mode 4WD system provides 4 positions (AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can select the desired drive mode according to the driving conditions.

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift Switch Position Wheels Driven

Indicator Light Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer 4LO position

AUTO

Rear wheels or 4 wheels

For driving on paved or slippery roads

Move the 4WD switch. 2WD <> AUTO <> 4H 4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift po- sition engaged. IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO MOVE THE SHIFT SE- LECTOR TO THE N POSITION IN THIS OPERATION. PERFORM THIS OPERATION WHEN DRIVING STRAIGHT.

2WD

Rear wheels For driving on dry, paved roads (Economy drive)

4H

4 wheels For driving on rocky, sandy or snow- covered roads

Neutral

*1 May blink

Neutral disengages the automatic transmission mechanical parking lock, which will allow the vehicle to roll. Do not leave the transfer shift position in Neutral.*2

1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Move the shift selector to the N position. 3. Push the 4WD shift switch and move it to 4LO or

4H with the brake pedal depressed. YOU CANNOT MOVE THE TRANSFER 4WD SHIFT SWITCH BETWEEN 4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST STOPPED THE VE- HICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT SELECTOR TO NEUTRAL. *3

4LO 4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum power and traction is required (for example: on steep grades or rocky, sandy, muddy roads)

5-24 Starting and driving

*1: The transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink. Stop the vehicle. Be sure to shift the 4WD shift switch after the shift selector has been moved to the N position. If the indicator light keeps blinking after the 4WD shift procedure in the previous page, drive slowly without abrupt maneuvers for a while. Then the light will turn on or off. Avoid making a turn or abrupt starts while shifting to 4LO. Otherwise gears may grind, damaging the drive system.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition switch must be ON and the vehicles engine must be running for a shift to take place and for the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also turn on when 4LO is selected. See Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system later in this section.

Starting and driving 5-25

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on the driving conditions. There are four types of drive modes available, AUTO, 2WD, 4H and 4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls the transfer case operation. Rotate the switch to move between each mode, 2WD, AUTO, 4H and 4LO.

You must push the switch in to select 4LO, and the vehicle MUST be stationary and the shift selector in the N position when chang- ing into or out of 4LO.

WARNING

When parking, apply the parking brake before stopping the engine and make sure that the 4WD shift indicator light is on and the ATP warning light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle could unexpectedly move even if the automatic transmission is in the P position.

CAUTION

Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

The 4H position provides greater trac- tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will cause increased fuel consumption and higher oil temperatures, and could damage drivetrain components, Speeds over 62 MPH (100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

The 4LO position provides maximum power and traction. Avoid raising ve- hicle speed excessively, as the maxi- mum speed is approximately 31 MPH (50 km/h).

When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.

Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be- tween 2WD, AUTO and 4H) while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the en- gine brake and low automatic transmis- sion gears (D1 or D2) for engine braking.

Do not operate the 4WD shift switch (between 2WD, AUTO and 4H) with the rear wheels spinning.

Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise and tire wear. NISSAN recommends driving in the 2WD or AUTO position under these conditions.

The 4WD transfer case may not be shifted between 4H and 4LO at low am- bient temperatures and the transfer 4LO position indicator light may blink even when the 4WD shift switch is shifted. After driving for a while you can change the 4WD transfer case between 4H and 4LO.

When driving on rough roads,

Set the 4WD shift switch to AUTO, 4H or 4LO.

Drive carefully according to the road surface conditions.

5-26 Starting and driving

When the vehicle is stuck,

Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

If it is difficult to free the vehicle, repeat forward and backward movement to in- crease the movement.

If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place stones or wooden blocks under the tires. Then try the recovery procedures above. Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION

Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires will sink deep into the mud, making it difficult to free the vehicle.

Avoid shifting gears with the engine running at high speeds as this may cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the 2WD, AUTO, 4H or 4LO position, depend- ing on driving conditions.

With the switch set to the AUTO position, distribution of torque to the front and rear wheels changes automatically, depending on road conditions encountered [ratio; 0 : 100 (2WD) 50 : 50 (4WD)]. This results in improved driving stability.

If the 4WD shift switch is operated while making a turn, accelerating or decelerating or if the ignition switch is turned off while in the AUTO, 4H or 4LO, you may feel a jolt. This is not abnormal.

When the vehicle is stopped after mak- ing a turn, you may feel a slight jolt after the shift selector is shifted to N or P. This occurs because the transfer clutch is released and not because of a malfunction.

CAUTION

When driving straight, shift the 4WD shift switch to the 2WD, AUTO or 4H position. Do not move the 4WD shift switch when making a turn or reversing.

Do not shift the 4WD shift switch while driving on steep downhill grades. Use the engine brake and low automatic transmission gears (D1 or D2) for en- gine braking.

Do not operate the 4WD shift switch with the rear wheels spinning.

LSD0144

Starting and driving 5-27

Before placing the 4WD shift switch in the 4H position from 2WD or AUTO, ensure the vehicle speed is less than 62 MPH (100 km/h). Failure to do so can damage the 4WD system.

Never shift the 4WD shift switch be- tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

Engine idling speed is high while warm- ing up the engine. Be especially careful when starting or driving on slippery sur- faces with the 4WD shift switch set in AUTO.

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in the vehicle information display.

The light should turn off within 1 second after turning the ignition switch to the ON position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift indi- cator light will illuminate the position selected by the 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blink while shifting from one drive mode to the other. When the shifting is com- pleted, the 4WD shift indicator light will come on. If the indicator light does not come on immediately, make sure the area around the vehicle is safe, and drive the vehicle straight, accelerate or decelerate or move the vehicle in re- verse, then shift the 4WD shift switch.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

When the 4WD shift switch is turned to the AUTO position at low ambient tem- peratures, the 4WD shift indicator light may show 4H. If this happens, all four wheels are driven as torque distribution is in the 4H position. Be careful as the vehicle may become difficult to turn. When the vehicle is driven, the 4WD shift indicator light should change to AUTO.

LSD0147

5-28 Starting and driving

If the 4WD shift indicator light indica- tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD shift switch is shifted to the AUTO or 4H position at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD mode may be being engaged due to malfunctioning drive system. If the indicator does not return to normal and the 4WD warning light comes on, have the system checked by the nearest NISSAN dealer.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or blinks when:

Comes on

There is a mal- function in the 4wheel drive

system

Blinks rap- idly

The transfer case oil tem-

perature is ab- normally high

Blinks slowly

The difference in wheel rota- tion is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the meter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni- tion switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the ignition switch is ON, the warning light will either remain illuminated or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD shift indicator light goes out.

High-temperature transfer case oil makes the warning light blink rapidly (about twice per sec- ond). If the warning light blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle in a safe place imme- diately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch into 2WD and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

If the warning light comes on or blinks slowly during operation or rapidly after stopping the vehicle for a while, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not recommended when the 4WD warning light turns on.

When the warning light comes on, the 2WD mode may be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is in AUTO or 4H. Be especially careful when driving. If corre- sponding parts are malfunctioning, the 4WD mode will not be engaged even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or 4LO position on dry hard surface roads. Driv- ing on dry, hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary noise, tire wear and increased fuel consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on when you are driving on dry hard surface roads:

in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle, move the shift selector to the N posi- tion with the brake pedal depressed, and shift the 4WD shift switch to 2WD.

Starting and driving 5-29

If the warning light is still on after the above operation, have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

The transfer case may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking.

WARNING

Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- ure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and re- sult in an accident. Make sure the shift selector has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- tivate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in seri- ous accidents.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- tion.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-30 Starting and driving

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: A

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: B

Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: C

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the cen- ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at 2 wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-31

WARNING

While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- erating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the effect of the parking brake is weakened or when- ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a NISSAN dealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot pre- vent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remem- ber that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis- tances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon- sible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.

When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire and Loading Information label in the Technical and consumer informa- tion section of this manual.

For detailed information, see Wheels and tires in the Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip- pery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De- press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper- ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

5-32 Starting and driving

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunknoise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc- tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.

When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is re- quired while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve- hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC System helps to perform the following functions:

Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).

If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into 4LO the indicator light will come on and the VDC system will be turned off. See Us- ing four wheel drive (4WD) earlier in this section.

Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following condi- tions:

understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steer- ing input)

oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-33

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it can not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the indi- cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:

The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.

Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

See Slip indicator light and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light in the Instru- ments and controls section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the indicator light will come on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system. The indicator illuminates to indi- cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steer- ing operation at high speeds or by care- less or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicles suspension. If suspension parts such as shock ab- sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling per- formance, and the indicator may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indica- tor light may illuminate.

If engine control related parts are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the indicator light may illuminate.

When driving on extremely inclined sur- faces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate prop- erly and the indicator may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

5-34 Starting and driving

When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator may flash or the indicator light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or the indicator light may illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road. WARNING

Always turn and look back before back- ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for proper backing procedures.

Read and understand the limitations of the rear sonar system as contained in this section. Inclement weather may af- fect the function of the RSS; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob- jects to help avoid damaging the ve- hicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis- aligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measure- ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift selector is in R (Reverse). The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu- lar or moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is less than 12 in (30.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. If the RSS detects a station- ary or receding object further than 12 in (30.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

LSD0095

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-35

will sound for only 3 seconds. Once the system detects an object approaching, the tone will sound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition switch is ON. The front and rear sonar system off switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition switch must be ON, and the shift selector in R (Reverse). An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a malfunction in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bum- per fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumu- lations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect the accuracy of the RSS.

WARNING

Always turn and look back before back- ing up. The rear sonar system is not a substitute for proper backing procedures.

Always look around before proceeding. The front sonar system is not a substi- tute for proper driving procedures.

Read and understand the limitations of the front and rear sonar system as con- tained in this section. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar system, this may include reduced performance or a false activation.

This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.

Rear Sensor LSD0095

Front Sensor LSD0202

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)

5-36 Starting and driving

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary ob- jects to help avoid damaging the ve- hicle. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the front bumper fascia or the rear bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper. The rear sonar system automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 MPH (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

The Rear Sonar System detects obstacles up to 5.9 feet (1.8 meters) from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approxi- mate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. If it detects a stationary or receding object further

than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only three sec- onds. Once the system detects an object ap- proaching, the tone will sound again.

The Front Sonar System sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the front bumper. The front sonar system automatically turns on when the shift selector is placed in a forward gear and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The system may not detect objects at speeds above 3 MPH (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

The Front Sonar System detects obstacles up to 3 feet (1.0 m) from the front bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to the illustration for approxi- mate zone coverage areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is less than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound continuously. If it detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone will sound for only three sec- onds. Once the system detects an object ap- proaching, the tone will sound again.

The front and rear sonar system OFF switch on the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the sonar system on and off. To turn the system off, the ignition must be ON, and the shift selector in R (Reverse) or D (Drive). An indicator light on the switch will illuminate when the system is turned off. If the indicator light illuminates when the system is not turned off, it may indicate a failure in the sonar system.

Keep the front and rear sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect the accuracy of the sonar system.

Starting and driving 5-37

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if so equipped) or the NISSAN Intelligent Key (if so equipped).

ANTI-FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- perature will drop below 32F (0C), check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. For details, see Engine cooling system in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- mum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For details, see Battery in the Main- tenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- freeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, see Changing engine coolant in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pave- ment. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your ve- hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom- mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability informa- tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see Tire chains in the Maintenance and do-it- yourself section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.

A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield- washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-38 Starting and driving

Whatever the condition, drive with cau- tion. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.

Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reach- ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

Do not use the cruise control on slip- pery roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20F (-7C) or lower.

WARNING

Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se- riously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.

Disconnect and properly store the en- gine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex- tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110- volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop- erly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-39

MEMO

5-40 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Emergency engine shut off (Push-button ignition models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:

Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency condi- tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

Turn signals do not work when the haz- ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

LIC0394

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF (Push-button ignition models only)

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- sure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys- tem also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer to Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders in the Instruments and controls section, Tire pressure information in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section and Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving section.

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufac- turer for the possible influences before use.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under- inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an acci- dent and could result in serious per- sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be- low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance person- nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the automatic transmission is shifted into P (Park).

Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- sional road assistance.

Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks 1 at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire 2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools 1. Lift the luggage board in the cargo area and

remove the jack tool kit A from the storage area. See Cargo area storage bin in the Instruments and controls section.

2. Remove the cargo area storage bin cover. See Cargo area storage bin in the Instru- ments and controls section.

WCE0044 LCE0158

6-4 In case of emergency

3. Unscrew the rotating mechanism A coun- terclockwise until loosened on cradle. Re- move the jack.

4. Assemble the two straight pieces of the jack rod. Find the oval-shaped opening above the middle of the license plate. Pass the T-shaped end of the jack rod through the opening and direct it toward the spare tire winch, located directly above the spare tire.

CAUTION

Do not insert the jack rod straight as it is designed to be inserted at an angle as shown.

5. Fit the square end of the jack rod into the square hole of the wheel nut wrench to form a handle.

6. Seat the T-shaped end of the jack rod into the T-shaped opening of the tire winch. Ap- ply pressure to keep the jack rod engaged in the spare tire winch and turn the jack rod counterclockwise to lower the spare tire.

7. Once the spare tire is completely lowered, reach under the vehicle, remove the retainer chain, and carefully slide the tire from under the rear of the vehicle.

WCE0192 LCE0084 LCE0085

In case of emergency 6-5

CAUTION

Be sure to center the spare tire suspend- ing plate on the wheel and then lift the spare tire.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire

WARNING

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is nec- essary to work under the vehicle, sup- port it with safety stands.

Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.

Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

Never use blocks on or under the jack.

Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.

Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.

Always refer to the illustration for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instruc- tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

NOTE:

Before jacking up the vehicle, make sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the vehicle is lifted up with the ignition switch placed in the ON position the auto-leveling suspension (if so equipped) will become disabled after 60 seconds. To reset the auto-leveling sus- pension, cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF one time.

6-6 In case of emergency

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar- rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm and level ground.

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire.

WCE0139 LCE0087

In case of emergency 6-7

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading Wheels and tires in the Mainte- nance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be- tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illustrated. Lower the ve- hicle completely.

WARNING

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve- hicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 Nm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recom- mended that wheel nuts be tightened to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mi. (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire pressure, the display(if so equipped) of the tire pressure information may show higher pressure than the COLD tire pres- sure after the vehicle has been driven more than 1 mi. (1.6 km). This is because the tire pressure increases as the tire temperature rises. This does not indicate a system mal- function.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip- ment in the vehicle.

WCE0063

6-8 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly se- cured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.

The spare tire is designed for emer- gency use. See specific instructions un- der the heading Wheels and tires in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be fol- lowed.

If the battery of a vehicle equipped with the NISSAN Intelligent Key is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position, even when using the me- chanical key or the valet key. Connect the jumper cables to another vehicle, as in the case of a discharged battery, and then the ignition switch can be moved from the LOCK position. Then, jump start the ve- hicle.

WARNING

If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres- ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor- rosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, imme- diately flush the contacted area with water.

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause se- rious injury.

Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the two vehicles to bring their bat- teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se- lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi- tioner, etc.).

3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so equipped). Cover the battery with an old cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence illustrated (A , B , C , D ).

CAUTION

Always connect positive () to positive () and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) not to the battery.

Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine com- partment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve- hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en- gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon- nect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

WCE0054

6-10 In case of emergency

WARNING

Do not push start this vehicle. The three- way catalyst may be damaged.

CAUTION

Automatic transmission models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempt- ing to do so may cause transmission damage.

WARNING

Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reser- voir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is com- ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading and the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift selector to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en- gine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam- age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail- able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera- tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

When towing, make sure that the trans- mission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.

Always attach safety chains before towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to Flat towing in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN

Two-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow automatic transmission models with the rear wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the front wheels raised always use towing dollies under the rear wheels.

When towing automatic transmission models with the front wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- tion. This may cause damage to the lock mechanism(for models with a steering lock mechanism).

If the speed or distance must necessarily be greater, remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission.

ACE1037

In case of emergency 6-13

Four-wheel drive models NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the ve- hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- sonal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:

Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.

Attach recovery devices only to main structural members of the vehicle or the recovery hooks.

WCE0162 LCE0083

6-14 In case of emergency

Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.

Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturers instructions.

Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifi- cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturers instructions for the recovery de- vice.

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or vehicle recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System (VDC).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back- ward.

Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.

Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R and D.

Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

after a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.

after driving on coastal roads.

when contaminants such as soot, bird drop- pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.

when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, espe- cially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical deter- gents, gasoline or solvents.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- stances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash- ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- riod and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electri- cal conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp- ened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as am- bient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub- ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat- ing on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.

Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com- pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- facturers recommendations. Some fabric pro- tectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classifica- tion sensor. This can also affect the opera- tion of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- lar material.

Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia- based cleaners as they may damage the leathers natural finish.

Never use fabric protectors unless rec- ommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:

Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per- manent discoloration when they contact ve- hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh- ener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.

Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause imme- diate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturers in- structions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision or injury:

NEVER place a floor mat on top of an- other floor mat in the driver front position.

Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats specifically designed for use in your ve- hicle model. See your NISSAN dealer for more information.

Properly position the mats in the floor- well using the floor mat positioning aid. See Floor mat positioning aid in this section.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex- tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main- tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

Floor mat positioning aid This vehicle includes two drivers side front floor mat brackets and one passengers side front floor mat bracket to help keep your floor mats in place. Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed for your vehicle model. The drivers side floor mat has two grommet holes incorporated in it and the passengers side has one grommet hole. Position each mat by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat grommet holes while centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. See Seat belt maintenance in the Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemen- tal restraint system section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

Damage to paint and other protective coat- ings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve- hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

LAI0009

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-5

Temperature High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.

Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.

Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de- bris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro- sion, which may be required in some areas, con- sult a NISSAN dealer.

7-6 Appearance and care

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

5-speed automatic transmission fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

In-cabin microfilter (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Keyfob (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 NISSAN Intelligent Key (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . 8-29

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42 Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43

Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini- mum maintenance requirements with long ser- vice intervals to save you both time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular mainte- nance is essential to maintain your NISSANs good mechanical condition, as well as its emis- sions and engine performance.

It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in your NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day op- eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- eration. It is your responsibility to perform these maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you, a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists who are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather than after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealers service department performs the best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be per- formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the Maintenance precau- tions later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with * is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when per- forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- hicle, etc.

Additional information on the following items with an * is found later in this sec- tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not bind or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift selector in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera- tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur- ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera- tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints and headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt web- bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield wiper and washer* Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for seviceable batteries) Check th e fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. In- stallation or extended use of electronic ac- cessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short dis- tances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the

carbon monoxide warning in the Starting and driving section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of the radia- tor and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, oth- erwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See the Appearance and care sec- tion of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau- tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift selector to P (Park).

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.

If you must work with the engine run- ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.

Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- matic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF posi- tion and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.

If you must run the engine in an en- closed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is neces- sary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.

On gasoline engine models, the fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Al- ways conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

Never leave the engine or automatic transmission related component har- nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This Maintenance and do-it-yourself section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

1. Battery 2. Fuse/fusible link box 3. Transmission dipstick 4. Engine oil filler cap 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 7. Air cleaner 8. Drive belt location 9. Radiator cap 10. Power steering fluid reservoir 11. Engine oil dipstick 12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0630

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con- tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en- gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in If your vehicle overheats found in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

The radiator is equipped with a pres- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- gine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34 F (-37 C). If additional freeze protec- tion is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the direc- tions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturers instructions to maintain minimum anti- freeze protection to -34 F (-37 C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of cool- ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ- ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill cool- ant. Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for more details.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re- duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for more details.

The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur- ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten it until a clicking sound is heard.

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheat- ing.

WARNING

To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the en- gine is hot.

Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

LDI0369

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) marks B . This is the normal oper- ating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark A , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill C .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op- erating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI0370 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap A by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug B .

5. Remove the drain plug B with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. See Changing engine oil filter in this section.

Waste oil must be disposed of prop- erly.

Check your local regulations.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque: 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 Nm)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely.

See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and con- sumer information section of this manual for drain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re- quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

WDI0504

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter A .

4. Loosen the oil filter A with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to an oil leak and engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

When checking or replacement is required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.

Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deteriora- tion in driveability and automatic trans- mission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim- ited warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid is also described on caution labels located in the engine compartment.

WDI0505

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122 - 176F (50 - 80C) or using the COLD MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera- tures of 32 - 86F (0 - 30C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu- ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX depending on system fluid temperature. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

DO NOT OVERFILL.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information, refer to Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con- tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehi- cles stopping ability.

Clean the filler cap before removing.

Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

WDI0256

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BRAKE FLUID Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi- cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield- washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturers in- structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind- shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti- freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine anti-freeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint.

Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concen- trates at full strength. Some methyl al- cohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield- washer fluid reservoir.

Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reser- voir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

LDI0374 LDI0375

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.

If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro- gen gas generated by the battery is ex- plosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touch- ing a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat- tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

When working on or near a battery, al- ways wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.

Battery posts, terminals and related ac- cessories contain lead and lead com- pounds. Wash hands after handling.

Keep battery out of the reach of children.

Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level.

BATTERY

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see Jump starting in the In case of emergency section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

LDI0302

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

CAUTION

Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will by- pass the variable voltage control sys- tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.

Use electrical accessories with the en- gine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

The current sensor A is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add elec- trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Automatic belt tensioner 3. Water pump 4. Cooling fan 5. Air conditioner compressor 6. Crankshaft pulley 7. Generator

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

LDI0706 WDI0661

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi- tion and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule found in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped A spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol- low the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re- gapping.

Always replace spark plugs with rec- ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re- move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Mainte- nance Guide.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner cover upward.

2. Remove the air cleaner filter.

3. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous- ing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING

Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or oth- ers to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the flame if the engine backfires. If it isnt there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER (if so equipped) The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air- borne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for change intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce- dure:

WDI0712

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box screws. 2. Open the glove box, then remove the three upper glove box screws. Remove the glove box assembly from the instrument panel to access the in-cabin microfilter cover.

3. Remove the filter cover bolt and remove the filter cover.

WDI0622 WDI0623 LDI0387

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

NOTE:

The filters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the filter with the arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should face downward.

4. Insert the first filter into the housing and slide it over to the right. Insert the second filter into the housing.

5. Replace the filter cover.

6. Install the glove box assembly.

7. Fill out the date information on the small replacement label and attach it to the glove box lid.

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind- shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam- age the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper blade down the wiper arm to remove.

3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

LDI0404 WDI0408

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

6. Return the wiper to its original position and release it until it has made contact with the windshield.

CAUTION

After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be dam- aged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle A . This may cause clogging or improper wind- shield washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin B .

WDI0629

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Rear window wiper blade

1 Lift the wiper arm away from the rear win- dow.

2 Rotate the blade until it becomes free.

3 Insert a new blade onto the wiper arm and snap into place.

LDI0379

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re- placement, a high pitched scraping or screech- ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa- sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For more information regarding brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte- nance schedule information in the NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide.

Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B is used in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com- partment and passenger compartment fuse boxes.

LDI0455

BRAKES FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse, the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under- hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0457 LDI2153

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

5. If the fuse is open A , replace it with a new fuse B .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Fusible links If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or cause a fire.

WDI0452 LDI0381 LDI0618

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the glove box to access the fuse box cover.

3. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open A , replace it with an equivalent good fuse B .

6. Push the fuse box cover to install.

7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired by a NISSAN dealer.

Type A WDI0452

Type B LDI0456

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Extended storage switch If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used for long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex- tended storage switch is broken it is not necessary to replace it. Replace only the open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs 1 found on each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the fuse box 2 .

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

LDI2035

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

KEYFOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:

1 Open the lid using a coin A .

2 Remove the battery B .

3 Install a new battery C with the + facing down.

Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seri- ously deplete the storage capacity.

Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as it could cause a malfunction.

When changing the battery, do not let dust or oil get on the keyfob.

There is danger of explosion if a lithium bat- tery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

4 Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then the button two or three times to check the key- fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reason other than replacement, perform step 5.

An improperly disposed battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

The keyfob is water-resistant; how- ever, if it does get wet, immediately wipe completely dry.

The operational range of the keyfob extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary with conditions.

LDI0484

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

FCC Notice:

For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada: This device complies with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, in- cluding interference that may cause unde- sired operation of the device.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY (if so equipped) Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol- lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli- gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver A into the slit B of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva- lent.

Do not touch the internal circuit and elec- tric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

Make sure that the + side faces the bot- tom of the case.

WDI0620

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated C D .

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference re- ceived, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada: This device complies with RSS-210 of In- dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, in- cluding interference that may cause unde- sired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTS Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be- cause the headlight assembly must be removed from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE HANDS.

Do not leave the bulb out of the head- light reflector for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the per- formance of the headlight.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0621

LIGHTS

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

NOTE:

Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

CAUTION

High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.

When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.

Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.

Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, mois- ture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.

2. The fog light is accessible in front of the front tire and behind the bumper.

3. Disconnect the bulb connector 1 .

4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and re- move.

5. Remove by pulling it straight out of the fog light assembly. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not touch the glass envelope.

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE:

To adjust the fog light vertical aim: Access the aiming screw from underneath the front bumper. The aiming screw is located on the bottom of the fog light housing. Turn the screw clockwise to raise the pattern. Turn the screw counterclockwise to lower the pattern.

LDI0382

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly* High 65 9005 (HB3) Low 55 9006 (HB4) Park/Turn 28/8 3457K Sidemarker 3.8 194

Side turn signal light* (if so equipped) (LED) Front fog light (if so equipped) 55 H11 Puddle lamp 9 906 Room/map lights 8 Personal lights 6 WXW52 Footwell* 3.4 1 58 Glove box light* 3.4 158 Vanity mirror light 1.8 Step light 3.8 194 Cargo light 8 AL67 High-mounted stop light* (LED) Rear combination light

Tail/Stop 27/8 3157KX RD Backup (reversing) 18 921LF Turn 18 3156K

License plate light 5 W5W

* See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

1. Room/map light 2. Front personal lights 3. Step light 4. Puddle lamp/Side turn signal light (if so

equipped) 5. High-mount stoplight 6. Cargo light 7. License plate light 8. Rear combination light 9. Headlight assembly 10. Fog light (if so equipped)

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installationLDI0383

WDI0263

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing.

Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing.

Map lights LDI0389

Personal lights LDI0364

Vanity mirror LDI0385

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 1 to protect the housing. Step light

LDI0341

Puddle light LDI0388

Cargo light WDI0233

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

If you have a flat tire, see Flat tire in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the ve- hicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pres- sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not de- tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

License plate light LDI0384

Rear combination light WDI0403

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

For more details, refer to Low tire pres- sure warning light in the Instruments and controls section, Tire pressure informa- tion in the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems section, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Starting and driving sec- tion, and Flat tire in the In case of emer- gency section.

Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the Cold Tire Pressure heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:

Most tires naturally lose air over time.

Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under in- flation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

Improperly inflated tires can fail sud- denly and cause an accident.

The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la- bel. The vehicle weight capacity is indi- cated on the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to pre- mature tire failure, or unfavorable han- dling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading be- yond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety In- formation (US) or Tire Safety Informa- tion (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Tire and loading information label

1 Seating capacity: The maximum num- ber of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor- mation in the Technical and con- sumer information section.

3 Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicles GVWR.

5 Tire size - refer to Tire labeling later in this section.

6 Spare tire size.

LDI0485

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem side- ways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specifica- tion shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Original Tire: P265/70R18 P275/60R20

250 kPa, 36 PSI

Rear Original Tire: P265/70R18 P275/60R20

250 kPa, 36 PSI

Spare Tire: P265/70R18 P275/60R20

250 kPa, 36 PSI

LDI0393

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information iden- tifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also pro- vides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The P indicates the tire is de- signed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num- ber gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to side- wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tires ratio of height to width.

4. R: The R stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tires load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires be- cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

Example WDI0394

Example WDI0395

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the Depart- ment Of Transportation. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturers identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional).

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac- ture.

6. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For ex- ample, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber- coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur- ers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

4 Maximum permissible inflation pres- sure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible in- flation pressure.

5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be car- ried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory in- stalled tire.

6 Term of tubeless or tube type

Indicates whether the tire requires an in- ner tube (tube type) or not (tubeless).

Example WDI0396

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

7 The word radial

The word radial is shown if the tire has radial structure.

8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pres- sure warning system.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety In- formation (US) or Tire Safety Informa- tion (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially re- duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installed on P275/60R20 size tires. Installation of the tire chains/cables on P275/60R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire chains/cables, you should install P265/70R18 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturers suggestions. Use only SAE class S chains. Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class S chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufac- turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load- ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi- tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on clear paved roads.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See Flat tire in the In case of emer- gency section in this manual for tire re- placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 Nm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight- ened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

Tires should be periodically in- spected for wear, cracking, bulg- ing or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be ob- vious. Replace the tires as neces- sary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.

Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal in- jury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer.

For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.

WDI0259

8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. Recommended types and sizes are shown in Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

WARNING

The use of tires other than those recom- mended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clear- ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to acci- dents and could result in serious per- sonal injury.

If your vehicle was originally equipped with 4 tires that were the same size and you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an acci- dent and personal injury.

If the wheels are changed for any rea- son, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- hicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such inter- ference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to Wheels and tires in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual for wheel off-set dimensions.

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been re- paired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail with- out warning.

The use of retread tires is not recommended.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety In- formation (US) or Tire Safety Informa- tion (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- tion Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may dam- age the transmission, transfer case and differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal- anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Infor- mation (Canada) in the Warranty In- formation Booklet.

Care of wheels Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Fuel recommendation (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Flexible fuel vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Snow plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-33 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Owners Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-34

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 28 gal 23-1/4 gal 105.8 See Fuel recommendations later in this section.*1 Engine oil *8

Drain and Refill With oil filter change 6-7/8 qt 5-3/4 qt 6.5

Engine oil with API Certification Mark *2 Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter

change 6-1/2 qt 5-1/2 qt 6.2

Cooling system With reservoir 3-3/4 gal 3-1/8 gal 14.4 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the instruc- tions in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section.

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF *3 Power steering fluid (PSF) Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*4 Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3 Multi-purpose grease NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base) Air conditioning system refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) *6 Air conditioning system oil Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6 Transfer fluid 3-1/8 qt 2-5/8 qt 3.0 Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended *7 Front differential gear oil 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt 1.6 Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5, Viscosity

SAE 80W-90 *9 Rear differential gear oil 3-3/4 pt 3-1/8 pt 1.75 API GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90*10 Windshield-washer fluid (shared be- tween front and rear wipers)

1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For further details, see Fuel recommendation in this section. *2: For further details, see Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in this section. *3: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or

Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*4: DEXTRON VI type ATF may also be used. *5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer. *6: For further details, see Air conditioner specification label in this section. *7: Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and transfer case durability, and may damage the transfer case, which is not covered by

the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty. *8: For further details, see Changing engine oil in the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section. *9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 80W-90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0 C (32 F). *10: See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad- versely affect the emission control de- vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam- age caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia- tion or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi- cations where it is available. Many of the automo- bile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- gests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy- genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel com- patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de- termined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should con- tain no more than 10% oxygenate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)

Technical and consumer information 9-3

E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy- genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and sys- tems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new ve- hicle limited warranty.

If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corro- sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- lated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not avail- able to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN ve- hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall- ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

E15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov- ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens- ing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbre- viation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec- tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se- vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are en- countered, have your vehicle checked at a NISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

9-4 Technical and consumer information

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel Etha- nol, Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels combined.

U.S. government regulations require Fuel Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

CAUTION

Use of other fuels such as Fuel Methanol may cause powertrain damage or a loss of vehicle performance.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will cause damage to the three-way catalyst.

General information

This information is for Flexible Fuel vehicles (FFV) only. FFV vehicles can be identified by the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only cov- ers those subjects that are unique to Flexible Fuel vehicles.

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door la- bel can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel etha- nol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING

Ethanol vapors are extremely flam- mable and could cause serious per- sonal injury.

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler cap or filling the tank.

Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.

Fuel requirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded regu- lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91), or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of these two.

For the best starting and vehicle driveability re- sults, do not continually switch between E-85 and unleaded regular gasoline. If you must switch fuels, NISSAN recommends the following:

do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less than 1/4 full

add more than 5 gallons of fuel

operate the vehicle immediately after refuel- ing for a period of at least 5 minutes

NOTE:

When the ambient temperature is above 90F (32C), you may experience hard start- ing and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuit- able for use when ambient temperatures fall be- low 0F (-18C). In the range of 0F (-18C) to 32F (0C), you may experience an increase in the time it takes for you engine to start, and a deterioration in drivability (sags and/or hesita- tions) until the engine is fully warmed up.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Fuel consumption

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gal- lon than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel consumption. You can expect your fuel mileage to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement parts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with etha- nol. Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.

CAUTION

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Maintenance

If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow the correct maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide.

CAUTION

Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. See Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna- tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis- cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica- tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- sary when the proper oil type is used and main- tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

LTI2024

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper- ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re- placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in Change intervals.

Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incor- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war- ranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:

repeated short distance driving at cold out- side temperatures

driving in dusty conditions

extensive idling

towing a trailer

stop and go commuting

Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refriger- ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air condition- ing system and will require the replace- ment of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earths atmosphere, certain government regula- tions require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys- tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

ENGINE

Model VK56DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 8-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 90 Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.858 x 3.622 (98 x 92) Displacement cu in (cm3) 338.78 (5,552) Firing order 18736542

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary. A/T (in N position) Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle

Spark plug Standard Model FFV Model DILFR5A-11 DILFR5A-11D

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

18 x 8.0JJ

20 x 8.0JJ

Tires

P265/70R18

P275/60R20

Spare tire Full size

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 207.7 (5,275) Overall width in (mm) 79.3 (2,016) Overall height

2wd with roof rack in (mm) 77.2 (1,962) 4wd with roof rack in (mm) 78.0 (1,982)

Front Track 18 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715) 20 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)

Rear Track 18 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715) 20 inch tire in (mm) 67.5 (1,715)

Wheelbase in (mm) 123.2 (3,130)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V. S.S. certification label on the

center pillar between the drivers side front and rear

doors.

Gross axle weight rating Front lb (kg) Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 9-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve- hicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi- cles engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There- fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis- sion control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; there- fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an- other country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transpor- tation, and registration are the responsibil- ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identifica- tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number) The vehicle identification number is located as shown.

LTI0085 LTI0086

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

9-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la- bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu- able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL The emission control information label is at- tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0095 WTI0099 WTI0189

Technical and consumer information 9-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is affixed to the underside of the hood as shown.

Use the following steps to mount the front license plate:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the location mark (small dimple) using a 0.20 in (5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure to the drill. Install the license plate holder using the two screws provided with the holder.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6- 14mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque: 3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb (5.10 - 6.37 Nm)

WTI0100 WTI0220 LTI0093

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

9-12 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- ously injured or killed.

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, flu- ids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not in- clude passengers and cargo.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas- sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is lo- cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This informa- tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the ve- hicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be in- cluded as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.

Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve- hicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Capacity on the Tire and Load- ing Information label.

To get the combined weight of occu- pants and cargo, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the follow- ing illustration.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail- able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capac- ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)

Example LTI0152

Technical and consumer information 9-15

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be trans- ferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this re- duces the available cargo and lug- gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. See Measurement of weights later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres- sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa- tion label.

SECURING THE LOAD There are tie down hooks located in the cargo area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than 55 lbs. (245 N) to a single A plastic hook or 44 lbs. (196 N) to a single B plastic hook when securing cargo.

Do not apply a total load of more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single metal floor tie-down hook when securing cargo.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- lision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seri- ously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

Cargo area ceiling tie-down hooks LTI0089

Cargo area floor tie-down hooks LTI0090

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat- backs. In a sudden stop or colli- sion, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could oc- cur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause per- sonal injury.

Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer brak- ing distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicles warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not ex- ceed either of the gross axle weight rat- ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or re- move items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trailer and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor- mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicles engine, drive train, steering, brak- ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing ca- pability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Maximum trailer loads Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the Towing Load/Specification chart found later in this sec- tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load/Specification chart. The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro- priate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0162

TOWING A TRAILER

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automati- cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a col- lision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv- ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a safe area. Allow the engine to cool and return to normal operation. See If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emer- gency section of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib- uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu- facturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow- ing Towing Load/Specification chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WTI0160 ATI1025

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicles maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following proce- dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail- able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the Towing Load/Specification chart found later in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail- able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified rat- ings.

Example:

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).

Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from Towing Load/Specification chart - 15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).

Maximum Trailer towing capacity from Tow- ing Load/Specification chart - 9,100 lb. (4,128 kg).

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg) GVWR

6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lb. (409 kg) Available for tongue weight

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg) GCWR

6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for towing

900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

9-20 Technical and consumer information

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passen- ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be- tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob- tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the Towing load/specification chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

US US CAN 2WD 4WD 4WD

Maximum Towing Ca- pacity*1 *2

w/o tow package 6,500 lb.

(2,948 kg) 6,500 lb.

(2,948 kg) 6,500 lb.

(2,948 kg)

with tow package 9,100 lb.

(4,128 kg) 9,000 lb.

(4,082 kg) 9,000 lb.

(4,082 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load

w/o tow package 650 lb.

(295 kg) 650 lb.

(295 kg) 650 lb.

(295 kg)

with tow package 910 lb.

(413 kg) 900 lb.

(408 kg) 900 lb.

(408 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight

Rating

w/o tow package 12,800 lb.

(5,806 kg) 13,000 lb.

(5,897 kg) 13,000 lb.

(5,897 kg)

with tow package 15,100 lb.

(6,849 kg) 15,100 lb.

(6,849 kg) 15,100 lb.

(6,849 kg) *1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi- cles maximum towing capacity. *2: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

TOWING SAFETY Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in- cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available from your NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca- pable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Hitch ball Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

The required hitch ball size is stamped on most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top of the ball.

Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.

The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should be no more than 1/16 smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or dead weight ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch This type of hitch is also called a load-leveling or equalizing hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles cant carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) . Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af- fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If you are considering use of a weight- distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac- turer for installing and using the weight- distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing hitch so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han- dling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailers brake sys- tem. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 10,000 lb (4,535 kg). A weight distributing hitch should be used to tow trailers that weigh over 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV trailer hitch equipment that has a 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) maximum weight rating, but your ve- hicle is only capable of towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this section.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

CAUTION

Special hitches which include frame re- inforcements are required for towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable genu- ine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts and hitch balls for pickup trucks and sport utility vehicles are available at a NISSAN dealer.

The hitch should not be attached to or affect the operation of the impact- absorbing bumper.

Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys- tem, brake system, etc. to install a trailer hitch.

To reduce the possibility of additional damage if your vehicle is struck from the rear, where practical, remove the receiver when not in use.

Regularly check that all trailer hitch mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures

When towing a trailer, inflate the ve- hicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the tire placard.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturers specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the chains to permit turning corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power- type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and turn signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicles electrical sys- tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob- tain the proper equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu- table trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are available at NISSAN deal- ers as well as auto parts stores and hitch retail- ers.

9-24 Technical and consumer information

Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake system MUST be used. However, most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op- eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric braking sys- tems are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special brake- sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are used, see Electric trailer brake controller in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip- ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly installed and demonstrate proper brake function testing.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di- rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Electric trailer brake controller Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re- quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer brake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and jumper harness that is specifically designed to be used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.

To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper harness, perform the following proce- dure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the rearmost position.

example LTI0117

Technical and consumer information 9-25

2. Apply the parking brake to access the jumper harness connector.

3. Locate the jumper harness connector under the lower portion of the instrument panel. The connector is taped to the wiring harness 1 as indicated.

The connector is marked with a white tag with elec brake conn.

Wire color designation for electric trailer brake controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTE RED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch

to trailer brake controller. BLACK Brake controller ground

(-). BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output. RED/BLUE Trailer brake controller

illumination. RED Fused trailer brake con-

troller battery feed (B+).

LTI0122 LTI0115

9-26 Technical and consumer information

4. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper harness to the connector 2 .

5. Release the parking brake.

6. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake controller according to the manufacturers instructions.

Pre-towing tips Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.

Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.

Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve- hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

Trailer towing tips In order to gain skill and an understanding of the vehicles behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor- mance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.

Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadver- tently becoming unlatched.

Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.

When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move your hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.

LTI0116

Technical and consumer information 9-27

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector to the P (Park) position before blocking the wheels and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks ab- sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if so equipped) indicates the transfer case is in 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is off. If the indicator light is flashing, or the ATP light is ON, make sure the transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. See Automatic transmission park warning light in the Instruments and

controls section and Using four wheel drive (4WD) in the Starting and driving section.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de- crease overall stability. Therefore, to main- tain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descend- ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides engine brak- ing and reduces the need to brake as fre- quently.

If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, refer to If your vehicle overheats in the In case of emergency section of this owners manual.

Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.

Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicles first 500 miles (805 km).

For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended Maintenance Schedule in the NISSAN Ser- vice and Maintenance Guide.

When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn than your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.

Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- ing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- hicle handling.

9-28 Technical and consumer information

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This com- bination will help stabilize the vehicle

Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal- anced as described earlier in this section.

Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires con- siderably more distance than normal pass- ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.

Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans- mission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

NISSAN recommends that the cruise con- trol not be used while towing a trailer.

Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con- nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

When launching a boat, dont allow the wa- ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.

Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre- quently. For additional information, see the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section earlier in this manual.

Tow mode (if so equipped)

Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi- nates when tow mode is selected. Press the TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off. Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

Tow mode includes the following features:

Grade logic Adjusts transmission shifts when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a grade.

Downhill Speed Control (DSC) automati- cally downshifts when driving down a grade with a trailer or heavy load to help control vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause any damage. However, fuel economy may be reduced and the transmission/engine driving characteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission oil/fluid should be changed more fre- quently. For additional information, see the Maintenance and do-it-yourself section earlier in this manual.

Technical and consumer information 9-29

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.

Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ways tow forward, never backward.

DO NOT tow any automatic transmis- sion vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

For emergency towing procedures refer to Towing recommended by NISSAN in the In case of emergency section of this manual.

Automatic Transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicles drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturers recommendations when using their product.

WARNING

Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing. Installing a snowplow may affect vehicle handling. This may cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as mea- sured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con- crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

SNOW PLOW UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

9-30 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces- sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor- mance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es- tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei- ther separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace- ment by writing to:

Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace- ment by writing to:

Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Technical and consumer information 9-31

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de- fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi- ately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be- come involved in individual problems be- tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve- hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de- fect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immedi- ately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con- duct a recall campaign. However, Trans- port Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canadas De- fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/ 7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans- port Canadas Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak- ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

9-32 Technical and consumer information

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re- quired to be in what is called the ready condi- tion for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicles inspection/maintenance test readiness condi- tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec- onds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is not ready. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is ready. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re- corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- ing how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand- ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip- ment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu- facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- ment, can read the information if they have ac- cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per- mitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 9-33

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory- trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer- ships. Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals can also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

1-800-450-9491 www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser- vice Manual or Owners Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca- tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

9-34 Technical and consumer information

10 Index 4WD warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

A

Adjusting pedal position . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57 Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71 Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-18 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Air conditioner

Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Heater and air conditioner controls . . . .4-40 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-26 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-95 Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-14 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-32 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

Bluetooth audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-64, 4-72

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-68

Audio System iPod Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85, 4-87

Audio system Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

Audio System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-68

Audio system Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-94 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79, 4-81

Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-37 Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-52 Automatic transmission position indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-15

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-33 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

B

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Block heater

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Bluetooth audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90

Bluetooth hands-free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96, 4-111 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-32 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-32 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-20, 8-23 Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-15, 4-30 Brightness control

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-13 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32

C

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Captains chair adjustment (2nd row) . . . . .1-4 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-93 CD player (See audio system) . . . . .4-64, 4-72 Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-34, 1-35, 1-36, 1-38 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-36, 1-44, 1-48, 1-53 Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-42

Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-41 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Clock

(models with navigation system) . . .4-11, 4-25 Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-25 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-64, 4-72 Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40, 2-46 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . .4-15, 4-30 Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23 Without navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Controls Audio controls (steering wheel). . . . . . .4-94 Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-40 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-42

Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . .1-69

D

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-33 Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-76 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-33 Display controls (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16 Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-20 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-15 Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-31 Engine

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13 Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8

Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light . . . . . . . . .2-15 Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16 Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

F

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

10-2

Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-64 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-25, 3-28

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Gauge

Automatic transmission fluid temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6 Engine oil pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Glass hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41

H

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96, 4-111 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-30 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls. . . . .4-40 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-42

HomeLink Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-58 Hood release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Hook

Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Image viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13 Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-11 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-33 Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-33 Intelligent Key system

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-17 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 iPod Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-85, 4-87 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

K

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-17

Keyless entry system (See remote keyless entry system). . . . . . . .3-7

L

Labels Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-11 Emission control information label . . . . .9-11

10-3

Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-11 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. .9-10 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-71

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38 License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23 Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-18 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-32 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-13 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-30 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-66 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Lights Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6

Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-28 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13 Luggage storage (see vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . .2-47

M

Maintenance Changing the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-21 Displaying the maintenance notice reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-22 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Resetting the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-21 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-21 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-33 Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-33

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54

N

NISSAN Intelligent Key . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-12 NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-27, 3-4,

5-13 NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-122

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-6 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Owners manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

10-4

Owners manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

P

Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Pedal position adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Phone, Bluetooth hands-free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-96, 4-111 Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Power vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

Precautions Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Precautions on child restraints. . . . . . . . .1-36, 1-44, 1-48, 1-53 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-24 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57 Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2

Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-70 Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

R

Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-96 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61, 4-68 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . .4-94

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . . .2-36 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-29 Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Registering your vehicle in another country . .9-10 Remote keyless entry system. . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-32 Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-20 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49

S

Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 Child seat belts . . . . .1-36, 1-44, 1-48, 1-53 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-32

Seat adjustment Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-3 Second row bench seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Second row captains chair. . . . . . . . . .1-4 Third row power folding seats . . . . . . .1-22

Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Seat belt

Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-35 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-24 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27 Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-70 Rear center seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-33 Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-27

Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Seats

Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Automatic drive positioner. . . . . . . . . .3-37 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Second row captains chair adjustment . . . . .1-4 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-34 Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23

10-5

Shifting Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-33 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . .1-69 Sonar

Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-71 Starting

Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Steering Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-31 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . .4-94 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40

Overhead storage compartment . . . . . .2-43 Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43, 2-47 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-71 Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-72, 2-18 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-64

Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-71 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-57

Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-57 Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-52 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-30 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9 Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . .2-36 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-6 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15

Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13 Third row power folding seats . . . . . . . . .1-22

Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Tilting steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30 Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-12 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43 Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43 Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-30 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9

Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-41 Towing

2-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18

Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38 Transceiver

HomeLink Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-58 Transmission

Driving with automatic transmission . . . .5-15 Travel (See registering your vehicle in another country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

10-6

U

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 USB interface

Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-79, 4-81 Video file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-83

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-9 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-36 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-33 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. . . .9-10 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14, 6-15 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-4, 5-13 Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-122 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8

W

Warning 4WD warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-72, 2-18

Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-14 Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-15 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Engine oil pressure low/engine coolant temperature high warning light . . . . . . .2-15 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2 Low fuel warning light . . . . .2-16, 2-18, 2-24 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-66 Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-26 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-71

Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9 When traveling or registering your vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Windows

Locking passengers windows . . . . . . .2-52 Manual vent windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Power vent windows. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-28

Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29 Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28 Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

10-7

RECOMMENDED FUEL (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle [FFV] option):

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad- versely affect the emission control de- vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam- age caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- fied by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbrevia- tion or the appropriate percentage for that region.

For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so equipped):

If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel vehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel Ethanol, Regular unleaded regular gasoline or any percentage of the two fuels com- bined.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, see Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants in the Technical and consumer information section of this manual.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL: Engine oil with API Certification Mark

Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See Engine oil and oil filter recommendations in the Technical and consumer information sec- tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE: See Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the drivers door. For additional information, see Wheels and tires in the Main- tenance and do-it-yourself section of this manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outlined in the Break-in schedule information found in the Starting and driving section of this manual. Fol- low these recommendations for the future reli- ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

2014 ARMADA OWNERS MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Armada Nissan works, you can view and download the Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Nissan Armada as well as other Nissan manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Nissan Armada. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Nissan Armada v3 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.